Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release...

196
RELION® 615 SERIES Line Differential Protection and Control RED615 Application Manual

Transcript of Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release...

Page 1: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

—RELION® 615 SERIES

Line Differential Protection andControlRED615Application Manual

Page 2: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content
Page 3: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Document ID: 1MRS756498Issued: 2018-12-20

Revision: NProduct version: 5.0 FP1

© Copyright 2018 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 4: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Copyright

This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without writtenpermission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license andmay be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

TrademarksABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand orproduct names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registeredtrademarks of their respective holders.

WarrantyPlease inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

www.abb.com/relion

Page 5: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Disclaimer

The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept orproduct description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual mustsatisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, includingthat any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. Inparticular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failurewould create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited topersonal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entityapplying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure thatall measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data andinformation via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network.It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for networkadministration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the necessarymeasures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application ofauthentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs, etc.)to protect the product and the network, its system and interface included, against anykind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/ortheft of data or information. ABB is not liable for any such damages and/or losses.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot becompletely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested tonotify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in noevent shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the useof this manual or the application of the equipment.

Page 6: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Conformity

This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communitieson the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagneticcompatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment foruse within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). Thisconformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the productstandard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed inaccordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.

Page 7: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.......................................................................5This manual........................................................................................ 5Intended audience.............................................................................. 5Product documentation.......................................................................6

Product documentation set............................................................6Document revision history............................................................. 6Related documentation..................................................................7

Symbols and conventions...................................................................7Symbols.........................................................................................7Document conventions..................................................................8Functions, codes and symbols...................................................... 9

Section 2 RED615 overview...........................................................15Overview...........................................................................................15

Product version history................................................................16PCM600 and relay connectivity package version........................17

Operation functionality......................................................................17Optional functions........................................................................17

Physical hardware............................................................................ 18Local HMI......................................................................................... 20

Display.........................................................................................21LEDs............................................................................................22Keypad........................................................................................ 22

Web HMI...........................................................................................22Authorization.....................................................................................24

Audit trail......................................................................................24Communication.................................................................................26

Self-healing Ethernet ring............................................................27Ethernet redundancy................................................................... 28Process bus.................................................................................30Secure communication................................................................32Protection communication and supervision.................................32

Section 3 RED615 standard configurations................................... 35Standard configurations....................................................................35

Addition of control functions for primary devices and the useof binary inputs and outputs........................................................ 37

Connection diagrams........................................................................39Standard configuration A.................................................................. 43

Applications................................................................................. 43

Table of contents

RED615 1Application Manual

Page 8: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Functions.....................................................................................44Default I/O connections.......................................................... 44Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................46

Functional diagrams.................................................................... 47Functional diagrams for protection ........................................ 47Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................51Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.........................52Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................54Functional diagrams for measurement functions................... 56Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs......................... 57Functional diagrams for other timer logics ............................ 60Other functions ...................................................................... 61

Standard configuration B.................................................................. 61Applications................................................................................. 61Functions.....................................................................................62

Default I/O connections.......................................................... 62Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................64

Functional diagrams.................................................................... 66Functional diagrams for protection......................................... 66Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................76Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.........................77Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................80Functional diagrams for measurement functions................... 83Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs......................... 84Functional diagrams for other timer logics............................. 87Other functions ...................................................................... 88

Standard configuration C..................................................................88Applications................................................................................. 88Functions.....................................................................................89

Default I/O connections.......................................................... 89Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................91

Functional diagrams.................................................................... 92Functional diagrams for protection......................................... 93Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................99Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................100Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................103Functional diagrams for measurement functions................. 106Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs....................... 107Functional diagrams for other timer logics........................... 110Other functions .................................................................... 111

Standard configuration D................................................................111Applications............................................................................... 111Functions...................................................................................112

Table of contents

2 RED615Application Manual

Page 9: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Default I/O connections........................................................ 113Default disturbance recorder settings...................................114

Functional diagrams.................................................................. 116Functional diagrams for protection ...................................... 117Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder......................128Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................129Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................132Functional diagrams for measurement functions ................ 135Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs....................... 137Functional diagrams for other timer logics........................... 140Other functions .................................................................... 141

Standard configuration E................................................................ 141Applications............................................................................... 141Functions...................................................................................143

Default I/O connections........................................................ 143Default disturbance recorder settings...................................145

Functional diagrams.................................................................. 147Functional diagrams for protection....................................... 148Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder......................158Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................159Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................162Functional diagrams for measurement functions................. 165Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs ...................... 167Other functions .................................................................... 170

Section 4 Requirements for measurement transformers..............171Current transformers...................................................................... 171

Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection.... 171Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limitfactor.................................................................................... 171Non-directional overcurrent protection................................. 172Example for non-directional overcurrent protection..............173

Section 5 Protection relay's physical connections........................175Inputs..............................................................................................175

Energizing inputs.......................................................................175Phase currents..................................................................... 175Residual current................................................................... 175Phase voltages.....................................................................175Residual voltage...................................................................176Sensor inputs....................................................................... 176

Auxiliary supply voltage input.................................................... 176Binary inputs..............................................................................176RTD/mA inputs.......................................................................... 178

Table of contents

RED615 3Application Manual

Page 10: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Outputs........................................................................................... 179Outputs for tripping and controlling............................................179Outputs for signalling.................................................................179IRF.............................................................................................181

Protection communication options..................................................181

Section 6 Glossary....................................................................... 183

Table of contents

4 RED615Application Manual

Page 11: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelinessorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose atypical protection function can be used. The manual can also be used when calculatingsettings.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for planning,pre-engineering and engineering.

The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical powerengineering and have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemesand principles.

1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction

RED615 5Application Manual

Page 12: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

Pla

nnin

g &

pu

rcha

se

Eng

inee

ring

Inst

alla

tion

Com

mis

sion

ing

Ope

ratio

n

Mai

nten

ance

Dec

omm

issi

onin

g,

dein

stal

latio

n &

dis

posa

l

Quick start guideQuick installation guideBrochureProduct guideOperation manualInstallation manualConnection diagramEngineering manualTechnical manualApplication manualCommunication protocol manualIEC 61850 engineering guidePoint list manualCyber security deployment guideline

GUID-12DC16B2-2DC1-48DF-8734-0C8B7116124C V2 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloadedfrom the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/relion.

1.3.2 Document revision historyDocument revision/date Product version HistoryA/2008-10-03 1.1 First release

B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version

C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version

D/2010-06-29 3.0 Terminology updated

E/2010-09-24 3.0 Content updated

F/2012-05-11 4.0 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version

G/2013-02-21 4.0 FP1 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version

Table continues on next page

Section 1 1MRS756498 NIntroduction

6 RED615Application Manual

Page 13: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Document revision/date Product version HistoryH/2013-12-20 5.0 Content updated to correspond to the

product version

K/2014-01-24 5.0 Content updated

L/2015-10-30 5.0 FP1 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version

M/2016-05-20 5.0 FP1 Content updated

N/2018-12-20 5.0 FP1 Content updated

Download the latest documents from the ABB Web sitehttp://www.abb.com/relion.

1.3.3 Related documentationName of the document Document IDModbus Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756468

DNP3 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756709

IEC 60870-5-103 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756710

IEC 61850 Engineering Guide 1MRS756475

Engineering Manual 1MRS757121

Installation Manual 1MRS756375

Operation Manual 1MRS756708

Technical Manual 1MRS756887

Cyber Security Deployment Guideline 1MRS758280

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard whichcould result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which couldresult in personal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning relatedto the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of

1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction

RED615 7Application Manual

Page 14: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage toequipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts andconditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design yourproject or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understandthat under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may resultin degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,comply fully with all warning and caution notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.

• Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary alsocontains definitions of important terms.

• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using thepush button icons.To navigate between the options, use and .

• Menu paths are presented in bold.Select Main menu/Settings.

• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.To save the changes in nonvolatile memory, select Yes and press .

• Parameter names are shown in italics.The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.

• Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

• Input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier font.When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE.

• This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is "Advanced".

Section 1 1MRS756498 NIntroduction

8 RED615Application Manual

Page 15: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbolsTable 1: Functions included in the relay

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage

PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage

PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)

PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)

Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage

PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)

Three-phase directional overcurrentprotection, low stage

DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)

DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)

Three-phase directional overcurrentprotection, high stage

DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> (1) 67-2 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage

EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51N-1 (1)

EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 (2)

Non-directional earth-fault protection,high stage

EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Non-directional earth-fault protection,instantaneous stage

EFIPTOC1 Io>>> (1) 50N/51N (1)

Directional earth-fault protection, lowstage

DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)

DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)

Directional earth-fault protection, highstage

DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> (1) 67N-2 (1)

Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)

EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)

EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)

Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)

WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)

WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)

Transient/intermittent earth-faultprotection

INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF (1) 67NIEF (1)

Harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA (1) 51NHA (1)

Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using calculated Io

EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)

Negative-sequence overcurrentprotection

NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)

NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> (1) 46PD (1)

Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)

ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)

ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)

Table continues on next page

1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction

RED615 9Application Manual

Page 16: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIThree-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)

PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)

PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)

Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)

PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)

PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)

Positive-sequence undervoltageprotection

PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U+ (1)

Negative-sequence overvoltageprotection

NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47O- (1)

Frequency protection FRPFRQ1 f>/f<,df/dt (1) 81 (1)

FRPFRQ2 f>/f<,df/dt (2) 81 (2)

FRPFRQ3 f>/f<,df/dt (3) 81 (3)

FRPFRQ4 f>/f<,df/dt (4) 81 (4)

Three-phase thermal protection forfeeders, cables and distributiontransformers

T1PTTR1 3Ith>F (1) 49F (1)

Three-phase thermal overload protection,two time constants

T2PTTR1 3Ith>T/G/C (1) 49T/G/C (1)

Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO1 BST (1) BST (1)

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF (1) 51BF/51NBF (1)

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> (1) 68 (1)

Switch onto fault CBPSOF1 SOTF (1) SOTF (1)

Master trip TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)

TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)

Table continues on next page

Section 1 1MRS756498 NIntroduction

10 RED615Application Manual

Page 17: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIMultipurpose protection MAPGAPC1 MAP (1) MAP (1)

MAPGAPC2 MAP (2) MAP (2)

MAPGAPC3 MAP (3) MAP (3)

MAPGAPC4 MAP (4) MAP (4)

MAPGAPC5 MAP (5) MAP (5)

MAPGAPC6 MAP (6) MAP (6)

MAPGAPC7 MAP (7) MAP (7)

MAPGAPC8 MAP (8) MAP (8)

MAPGAPC9 MAP (9) MAP (9)

MAPGAPC10 MAP (10) MAP (10)

MAPGAPC11 MAP (11) MAP (11)

MAPGAPC12 MAP (12) MAP (12)

MAPGAPC13 MAP (13) MAP (13)

MAPGAPC14 MAP (14) MAP (14)

MAPGAPC15 MAP (15) MAP (15)

MAPGAPC16 MAP (16) MAP (16)

MAPGAPC17 MAP (17) MAP (17)

MAPGAPC18 MAP (18) MAP (18)

Fault locator SCEFRFLO1 FLOC (1) 21FL (1)

Line differential protection with in-zonepower transformer

LNPLDF1 3Id/I> (1) 87L (1)

High-impedance fault detection PHIZ1 HIF (1) HIZ (1)

Power quality

Current total demand distortion CMHAI1 PQM3I (1) PQM3I (1)

Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI1 PQM3U (1) PQM3V (1)

Voltage variation PHQVVR1 PQMU (1) PQMV (1)

Voltage unbalance VSQVUB1 PQUUB (1) PQVUB (1)

Control

Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB (1) I <-> O CB (1)

Disconnector control DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC (1) I <-> O DCC (1)

DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC (2) I <-> O DCC (2)

Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC (1) I <-> O ESC (1)

Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)

DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)

DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)

Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)

ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)

Autoreclosing DARREC1 O -> I (1) 79 (1)

Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN1 SYNC (1) 25 (1)

Condition monitoring and supervision

Table continues on next page

1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction

RED615 11Application Manual

Page 18: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSICircuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM (1) CBCM (1)

Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)

TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)

Current circuit supervision CCSPVC1 MCS 3I (1) MCS 3I (1)

Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC1 FUSEF (1) 60 (1)

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 PCS (1) PCS (1)

Runtime counter for machines anddevices

MDSOPT1 OPTS (1) OPTM (1)

Measurement

Disturbance recorder RDRE1 DR (1) DFR (1)

Load profile record LDPRLRC1 LOADPROF (1) LOADPROF (1)

Fault record FLTRFRC1 FAULTREC (1) FAULTREC (1)

Three-phase current measurement CMMXU1 3I (1) 3I (1)

Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 (1) I1, I2, I0 (1)

Residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 Io (1) In (1)

Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U (1) 3V (1)

VMMXU2 3U (2) 3V (2)

Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo (1) Vn (1)

Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 (1) V1, V2, V0 (1)

Three-phase power and energymeasurement

PEMMXU1 P, E (1) P, E (1)

RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 X130 (RTD) (1) X130 (RTD) (1)

Frequency measurement FMMXU1 f (1) f (1)

IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value sending SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER

IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled valuereceiving (voltage sharing)

SMVRCV SMVRCV SMVRCV

Other

Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs) TPGAPC1 TP (1) TP (1)

TPGAPC2 TP (2) TP (2)

TPGAPC3 TP (3) TP (3)

TPGAPC4 TP (4) TP (4)

Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, secondresolution)

TPSGAPC1 TPS (1) TPS (1)

Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, minuteresolution)

TPMGAPC1 TPM (1) TPM (1)

Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC1 PT (1) PT (1)

PTGAPC2 PT (2) PT (2)

Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC1 TOF (1) TOF (1)

TOFGAPC2 TOF (2) TOF (2)

TOFGAPC3 TOF (3) TOF (3)

TOFGAPC4 TOF (4) TOF (4)

Table continues on next page

Section 1 1MRS756498 NIntroduction

12 RED615Application Manual

Page 19: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSITime delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC1 TON (1) TON (1)

TONGAPC2 TON (2) TON (2)

TONGAPC3 TON (3) TON (3)

TONGAPC4 TON (4) TON (4)

Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC1 SR (1) SR (1)

SRGAPC2 SR (2) SR (2)

SRGAPC3 SR (3) SR (3)

SRGAPC4 SR (4) SR (4)

Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC1 MV (1) MV (1)

MVGAPC2 MV (2) MV (2)

Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC1 SPC (1) SPC (1)

SPCGAPC2 SPC (2) SPC (2)

Analog value scaling SCA4GAPC1 SCA4 (1) SCA4 (1)

SCA4GAPC2 SCA4 (2) SCA4 (2)

SCA4GAPC3 SCA4 (3) SCA4 (3)

SCA4GAPC4 SCA4 (4) SCA4 (4)

Integer value move MVI4GAPC1 MVI4 (1) MVI4 (1)

1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction

RED615 13Application Manual

Page 20: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

14

Page 21: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Section 2 RED615 overview

2.1 Overview

RED615 is a phase-segregated two-end line differential protection and control relaydesigned for utility and industrial power systems, including radial, looped and mesheddistribution networks with or without distributed power generation. RED615 is alsodesigned for the protection of line differential applications with a transformer withinthe protection zone. RED615 relays communicate between substations over a fiberoptic link or a galvanic pilot wire connection. RED615 is a member of ABB’s Relion®

product family and part of its 615 protection and control product series. The 615 seriesrelays are characterized by their compactness and withdrawable-unit design. Re-engineered from the ground up, the 615 series has been guided by the IEC 61850standard for communication and interoperability of substation automation equipment.

The relay provides unit type main protection for overhead lines and cable feeders indistribution networks. The relay also features current-based protection functions forremote back-up for down-stream protection relays and local back-up for the linedifferential main protection. Further, standard configurations B and C also includeearth-fault protection. Standard configurations D and E include directionalovercurrent and voltage based protection functions.

The relay is adapted for the protection of overhead line and cable feeders in isolatedneutral, resistance earthed, compensated (impedance earthed) and solidly earthednetworks. Once the relay has been given the application-specific settings, it candirectly be put into service.

The 615 series relays support a range of communication protocols including IEC61850 with Edition 2 support, process bus according to IEC 61850-9-2 LE, IEC60870-5-103, Modbus® and DNP3. Profibus DPV1 communication protocol issupported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 15Application Manual

Page 22: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

2.1.1 Product version historyProduct version Product history1.1 Product released

2.0 • Support for DNP3 serial or TCP/IP• Support for IEC 60870-5-103• New standard configurations B and C• Disturbance recorder upload via WHMI

3.0 • Additions to configuration B• Application configurability support• Analog GOOSE support• Large display with single line diagram• Enhanced mechanical design• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records• Admittance-based earth-fault protection• Residual overvoltage protection• Low voltage power supply option• Pilot wire modem support

4.0 • Additions/changes for configurations A-C• Dual fiber-optic Ethernet communication option (COM0032)• Generic control point (SPCGGIO) function blocks• Additional logic blocks• Button object for SLD• Controllable disconnector and earth switch objects for SLD• Wattmetric based E/F• Harmonics based E/F• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records

4.0 FP1 • Parallel use of IEC 61850 and DNP3 protocols• Parallel use of IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 protocols• Two selectable indication colors for LEDs (red or green)• Online binary signal monitoring with PCM600

5.0 • New configurations D and E• New layout in Application Configuration tool for all configurations• In-zone transformer application support• Fault locator• Load profile recorder• Optional RTD/mA inputs• Profibus adapter support• Support for multiple SLD pages• Import/export of settings via WHMI• Setting usability improvements• HMI event filtering tool

5.0 FP1 • IEC 61850 Edition 2• Currents sending support with IEC 61850-9-2 LE• Support for synchronism and energizing check with IEC 61850-9-2 LE• High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR) protocol• Parallel redundancy protocol (PRP-1)• Support for configuration migration (starting from Ver.3.0 to Ver.5.0 FP1)• Software closable Ethernet ports• Chinese language support• Report summary via WHMI• Voltage unbalance power quality option• Switch onto fault• Additional timer, set-reset and analog value scaling functions

Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview

16 RED615Application Manual

Page 23: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

2.1.2 PCM600 and relay connectivity package version

• Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 2.6 (Rollup 20150626) or later• RED615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.1 or later

• Parameter Setting• Signal Monitoring• Event Viewer• Disturbance Handling• Application Configuration• Signal Matrix• Graphical Display Editor• Communication Management• IED User Management• IED Compare• Firmware Update• Fault Record tool• Load Record Profile• Lifecycle Traceability• Configuration Wizard• AR Sequence Visualizer• Label Printing• IEC 61850 Configuration• IED Configuration Migration• Differential Characteristics Tool

Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web sitehttp://www.abb.com/substationautomation or directly with UpdateManager in PCM600.

2.2 Operation functionality

2.2.1 Optional functions

• Autoreclosing (configurations B, C, D and E only)• Modbus TCP/IP or RTU/ASCII• IEC 60870-5-103• DNP3 TCP/IP or serial• Admittance-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, D and E only)• Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, D and E only)• Harmonics-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, C, D and E only)• Power quality functions (configurations D and E only)• Fault locator (configurations D and E only)

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 17Application Manual

Page 24: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

• RTD/mA measurement (configuration D only)• IEC 61850-9-2 LE (configurations D and E only, with 2 × LC only)• IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization (with 2 × LC only)

2.3 Physical hardware

The protection relay consists of two main parts: plug-in unit and case. The contentdepends on the ordered functionality.

Table 2: Plug-in unit and case

Main Slot ID Content optionsPlug-in

unit- HMI Small (5 lines, 20 characters)

Large (10 lines, 20 characters) with SLD

Small Chinese (3 lines, 8 or more characters)Large Chinese (7 lines, 8 or more characters) withSLD

X100 Auxiliary power/BOmodule

48...250 V DC/100...240 V AC; or 24...60 V DC2 normally-open PO contacts1 change-over SO contacts1 normally open SO contact2 double-pole PO contacts with TCS1 dedicated internal fault output contact

X110 BIO module 8 binary inputs4 SO contacts

X120 AI/BI module Only with configuration B:3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)

1 residual voltage input (60...210 V)3 binary inputs

Only with configurations A, C and D:3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)

4 binary inputs

Table continues on next page

Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview

18 RED615Application Manual

Page 25: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Main Slot ID Content optionsCase X130 AI/BI module Only with configuration D:

3 phase voltage inputs (60...210 V)1 residual voltage input (60...210 V)4 binary inputs

AI/RTD/mA module Only with configuration D:3 phase voltage inputs (60...210 V)1 residual voltage input (60...210 V)1 generic mA input2 RTD sensor inputs

Sensor input module Only with configuration E:3 combi sensor inputs (three-phase current andvoltage)1 residual current input (0.2/1 A)1)

Optional BIO module Optional for configurations A, B and C:6 binary inputs3 SO contacts

X000 Communication module See the technical manual for details about differenttypes of communication modules.

1) The 0.2/1 A input is normally used in applications requiring sensitive earth-fault protection and featuringcore-balance current transformers.

Rated values of the current and voltage inputs are basic setting parameters of theprotection relay. The binary input thresholds are selectable within the range 16…176V DC by adjusting the binary input setting parameters.

See the installation manual for more information about the case andthe plug-in unit.

The connection diagrams of different hardware modules are presented in this manual.

Table 3: Input/output overview

Std.conf.

Order code digit Analog channels Binary channels 5-6 7-8 CT VT Combi

sensorBI BO RTD mA

A ACAD 4 - - 12 4 PO

+ 6 SO- -

AF 4 - - 18 4 PO+ 9 SO

- -

B AA / ABAC 4 1 - 11 4 PO

+ 6 SO- -

AE 4 1 - 17 4 PO+ 9 SO

- -

C ACAD 4 - - 12 4 PO

+ 6 SO- -

AF 4 - - 18 4 PO+ 9 SO

- -

Table continues on next page

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 19Application Manual

Page 26: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Std.conf.

Order code digit Analog channels Binary channels 5-6 7-8 CT VT Combi

sensorBI BO RTD mA

DFE / FF AD 4 5 - 12 4 PO

+ 6 SO2 1

AE / AF AG 4 5 - 16 4 PO+ 6 SO

- -

E DA AH 1 - 3 8 4 PO+ 6 SO

- -

2.4 Local HMI

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the protection relay. TheLHMI comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.

REF615

Overcurrent

Dir. earth-fault

Voltage protection

Phase unbalance

Thermal overload

Breaker failure

Disturb. rec. Triggered

CB condition monitoring

Supervision

Arc detected

Autoreclose shot in progr.

A070704 V4 EN

Figure 2: Example of the LHMI

Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview

20 RED615Application Manual

Page 27: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

2.4.1 Display

The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports two character sizes. Thecharacter size depends on the selected language. The amount of characters and rowsfitting the view depends on the character size.

Table 4: Small display

Character size1) Rows in the view Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) 5 20

Large, variable width (13 × 14 pixels) 3 8 or more

1) Depending on the selected language

Table 5: Large display

Character size1) Rows in the view Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) 10 20

Large, variable width (13 × 14 pixels) 7 8 or more

1) Depending on the selected language

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1 2

3 4A070705 V3 EN

Figure 3: Display layout

1 Header

2 Icon

3 Content

4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 21Application Manual

Page 28: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

2.4.2 LEDs

The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Ready, Start andTrip.

There are 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDs can beconfigured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI,WHMI or PCM600.

2.4.3 Keypad

The LHMI keypad contains push buttons which are used to navigate in different viewsor menus. With the push buttons you can give open or close commands to objects inthe primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a disconnector. Thepush buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help andswitch between local and remote control mode.

A071176 V1 EN

Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command pushbuttons and RJ-45 communication port

2.5 Web HMI

The WHMI allows secure access to the protection relay via a Web browser. When theSecure Communication parameter in the protection relay is activated, the Web serveris forced to take a secured (HTTPS) connection to WHMI using TLS encryption.TheWHMI is verified with Internet Explorer 8.0, 9.0, 10.0 and 11.0.

WHMI is disabled by default.

WHMI offers several functions.

Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview

22 RED615Application Manual

Page 29: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

• Programmable LEDs and event lists• System supervision• Parameter settings• Measurement display• Disturbance records• Fault records• Load profile record• Phasor diagram• Single-line diagram• Importing/Exporting parameters• Report summary

The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.

A070754 V6 EN

Figure 5: Example view of the WHMI

The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.

• Locally by connecting the laptop to the protection relay via the frontcommunication port.

• Remotely over LAN/WAN.

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 23Application Manual

Page 30: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

2.6 Authorization

Four user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each withdifferent rights and default passwords.

The default passwords in the protection relay delivered from the factory can bechanged with Administrator user rights.

User authorization is disabled by default for LHMI but WHMI alwaysuses authorization.

Table 6: Predefined user categories

Username User rightsVIEWER Read only access

OPERATOR • Selecting remote or local state with (only locally)• Changing setting groups• Controlling• Clearing indications

ENGINEER • Changing settings• Clearing event list• Clearing disturbance records• Changing system settings such as IP address, serial baud rate or

disturbance recorder settings• Setting the protection relay to test mode• Selecting language

ADMINISTRATOR • All listed above• Changing password• Factory default activation

For user authorization for PCM600, see PCM600 documentation.

2.6.1 Audit trail

The protection relay offers a large set of event-logging functions. Critical system andprotection relay security-related events are logged to a separate nonvolatile audit trailfor the administrator.

Audit trail is a chronological record of system activities that allows the reconstructionand examination of the sequence of system and security-related events and changes inthe protection relay. Both audit trail events and process related events can beexamined and analyzed in a consistent method with the help of Event List in LHMIand WHMI and Event Viewer in PCM600.

Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview

24 RED615Application Manual

Page 31: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The protection relay stores 2048 audit trail events to the nonvolatile audit trail.Additionally, 1024 process events are stored in a nonvolatile event list. Both the audittrail and event list work according to the FIFO principle. Nonvolatile memory is basedon a memory type which does not need battery backup nor regular component changeto maintain the memory storage.

Audit trail events related to user authorization (login, logout, violation remote andviolation local) are defined according to the selected set of requirements from IEEE1686. The logging is based on predefined user names or user categories. The user audittrail events are accessible with IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI.

Table 7: Audit trail events

Audit trail event DescriptionConfiguration change Configuration files changed

Firmware change Firmware changed

Firmware change fail Firmware change failed

Attached to retrofit test case Unit has been attached to retrofit case

Removed from retrofit test case Removed from retrofit test case

Setting group remote User changed setting group remotely

Setting group local User changed setting group locally

Control remote DPC object control remote

Control local DPC object control local

Test on Test mode on

Test off Test mode off

Reset trips Reset latched trips (TRPPTRC*)

Setting commit Settings have been changed

Time change Time changed directly by the user. Note that this is not usedwhen the protection relay is synchronised properly by theappropriate protocol (SNTP, IRIG-B, IEEE 1588 v2).

View audit log Administrator accessed audit trail

Login Successful login from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI, FTP orLHMI.

Logout Successful logout from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI, FTP orLHMI.

Password change Password changed

Firmware reset Reset issued by user or tool

Audit overflow Too many audit events in the time period

Violation remote Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),WHMI, FTP or LHMI.

Violation local Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),WHMI, FTP or LHMI.

PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events and process relatedevents. Audit trail events are visible through dedicated Security events view. Sinceonly the administrator has the right to read audit trail, authorization must be used in

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 25Application Manual

Page 32: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

PCM600. The audit trail cannot be reset, but PCM600 Event Viewer can filter data.Audit trail events can be configured to be visible also in LHMI/WHMI Event listtogether with process related events.

To expose the audit trail events through Event list, define theAuthority logging level parameter via Configuration/Authorization/Security. This exposes audit trail events to all users.

Table 8: Comparison of authority logging levels

Audit trail event Authority logging level

NoneConfiguration change

Settinggroup

Settinggroup,control

Settingsedit

All

Configuration change ● ● ● ● ●

Firmware change ● ● ● ● ●

Firmware change fail ● ● ● ● ●

Attached to retrofit testcase

● ● ● ● ●

Removed from retrofittest case

● ● ● ● ●

Setting group remote ● ● ● ●

Setting group local ● ● ● ●

Control remote ● ● ●

Control local ● ● ●

Test on ● ● ●

Test off ● ● ●

Reset trips ● ● ●

Setting commit ● ●

Time change ●

View audit log ●

Login ●

Logout ●

Password change ●

Firmware reset ●

Violation local ●

Violation remote ●

2.7 Communication

The protection relay supports a range of communication protocols including IEC61850, IEC 61850-9-2 LE, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus® and DNP3. Profibus DPV1

Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview

26 RED615Application Manual

Page 33: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

communication protocol is supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.Operational information and controls are available through these protocols. However,some communication functionality, for example, horizontal communication betweenthe protection relays, is only enabled by the IEC 61850 communication protocol.

The IEC 61850 communication implementation supports all monitoring and controlfunctions. Additionally, parameter settings, disturbance recordings and fault recordscan be accessed using the IEC 61850 protocol. Disturbance recordings are availableto any Ethernet-based application in the IEC 60255-24 standard COMTRADE fileformat. The protection relay can send and receive binary signals from other devices(so-called horizontal communication) using the IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE profile,where the highest performance class with a total transmission time of 3 ms issupported. Furthermore, the protection relay supports sending and receiving of analogvalues using GOOSE messaging. The protection relay meets the GOOSEperformance requirements for tripping applications in distribution substations, asdefined by the IEC 61850 standard.

The protection relay can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves oneclient connection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850and Modbus.

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed onintegrated optional communication modules. The protection relay can be connected toEthernet-based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-TX) or thefiber-optic LC connector (100Base-FX). An optional serial interface is available forRS-232/RS-485 communication.

2.7.1 Self-healing Ethernet ring

For the correct operation of self-healing loop topology, it is essential that the externalswitches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in theswitches. Otherwise, connecting the loop topology can cause problems to thenetwork. The protection relay itself does not support link-down detection or RSTP.The ring recovery process is based on the aging of the MAC addresses, and the link-up/link-down events can cause temporary breaks in communication. For a betterperformance of the self-healing loop, it is recommended that the external switchfurthest from the protection relay loop is assigned as the root switch (bridge priority= 0) and the bridge priority increases towards the protection relay loop. The end linksof the protection relay loop can be attached to the same external switch or to twoadjacent external switches. A self-healing Ethernet ring requires a communicationmodule with at least two Ethernet interfaces for all protection relays.

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 27Application Manual

Page 34: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Managed Ethernet switchwith RSTP support

Managed Ethernet switchwith RSTP support

Client BClient A

Network ANetwork B

GUID-283597AF-9F38-4FC7-B87A-73BFDA272D0F V3 EN

Figure 6: Self-healing Ethernet ring solution

The Ethernet ring solution supports the connection of up to 30protection relays. If more than 30 protection relays are to beconnected, it is recommended that the network is split into severalrings with no more than 30 protection relays per ring. Each protectionrelay has a 50-μs store-and-forward delay, and to fulfil theperformance requirements for fast horizontal communication, thering size is limited to 30 protection relays.

2.7.2 Ethernet redundancy

IEC 61850 specifies a network redundancy scheme that improves the systemavailability for substation communication. It is based on two complementaryprotocols defined in the IEC 62439-3:2012 standard: parallel redundancy protocolPRP and high-availability seamless redundancy HSR protocol. Both protocols rely onthe duplication of all transmitted information via two Ethernet ports for one logicalnetwork connection. Therefore, both are able to overcome the failure of a link orswitch with a zero-switchover time, thus fulfilling the stringent real-timerequirements for the substation automation horizontal communication and timesynchronization.

PRP specifies that each device is connected in parallel to two local area networks.HSR applies the PRP principle to rings and to the rings of rings to achieve cost-effective redundancy. Thus, each device incorporates a switch element that forwardsframes from port to port. The HSR/PRP option is available for all 615 series protectionrelays. However, RED615 supports this option only over fiber optics.

Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview

28 RED615Application Manual

Page 35: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

IEC 62439-3:2012 cancels and replaces the first edition published in2010. These standard versions are also referred to as IEC 62439-3Edition 1 and IEC 62439-3 Edition 2. The protection relay supportsIEC 62439-3:2012 and it is not compatible with IEC 62439-3:2010.

PRPEach PRP node, called a double attached node with PRP (DAN), is attached to twoindependent LANs operated in parallel. These parallel networks in PRP are calledLAN A and LAN B. The networks are completely separated to ensure failureindependence, and they can have different topologies. Both networks operate inparallel, thus providing zero-time recovery and continuous checking of redundancy toavoid communication failures. Non-PRP nodes, called single attached nodes (SANs),are either attached to one network only (and can therefore communicate only withDANs and SANs attached to the same network), or are attached through a redundancybox, a device that behaves like a DAN.

Ethernet switchIEC 61850 PRPEthernet switch

SCADACOM600

GUID-334D26B1-C3BD-47B6-BD9D-2301190A5E9D V2 EN

Figure 7: PRP solution

In case a laptop or a PC workstation is connected as a non-PRP node to one of the PRPnetworks, LAN A or LAN B, it is recommended to use a redundancy box device or anEthernet switch with similar functionality between the PRP network and SAN toremove additional PRP information from the Ethernet frames. In some cases, defaultPC workstation adapters are not able to handle the maximum-length Ethernet frameswith the PRP trailer.

There are different alternative ways to connect a laptop or a workstation as SAN to aPRP network.

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 29Application Manual

Page 36: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

• Via an external redundancy box (RedBox) or a switch capable of connecting toPRP and normal networks

• By connecting the node directly to LAN A or LAN B as SAN• By connecting the node to the protection relay's interlink port

HSRHSR applies the PRP principle of parallel operation to a single ring, treating the twodirections as two virtual LANs. For each frame sent, a node, DAN, sends two frames,one over each port. Both frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring and eachnode forwards the frames it receives, from one port to the other. When the originatingnode receives a frame sent to itself, it discards that to avoid loops; therefore, no ringprotocol is needed. Individually attached nodes, SANs, such as laptops and printers,must be attached through a “redundancy box” that acts as a ring element. For example,a 615 or 620 series protection relay with HSR support can be used as a redundancybox.

GUID-207430A7-3AEC-42B2-BC4D-3083B3225990 V2 EN

Figure 8: HSR solution

2.7.3 Process bus

Process bus IEC 61850-9-2 defines the transmission of Sampled Measured Valueswithin the substation automation system. International Users Group created aguideline IEC 61850-9-2 LE that defines an application profile of IEC 61850-9-2 tofacilitate implementation and enable interoperability. Process bus is used fordistributing process data from the primary circuit to all process bus compatibledevices in the local network in a real-time manner. The data can then be processed byany protection relay to perform different protection, automation and control functions.

Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview

30 RED615Application Manual

Page 37: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

UniGear Digital switchgear concept relies on the process bus together with currentand voltage sensors. The process bus enables several advantages for the UniGearDigital like simplicity with reduced wiring, flexibility with data availability to alldevices, improved diagnostics and longer maintenance cycles.

With process bus the galvanic interpanel wiring for sharing busbar voltage value canbe replaced with Ethernet communication. Transmitting measurement samples overprocess bus brings also higher error detection because the signal transmission isautomatically supervised. Additional contribution to the higher availability is thepossibility to use redundant Ethernet network for transmitting SMV signals.

Common EthernetStation bus (IEC 61850-8-1), process bus (IEC 61850-9-2 LE) and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization

GO

OS

E

SM

V

GO

OS

E

SM

V

SM

V

GO

OS

E

GO

OS

E

SM

V

GO

OS

E

SM

V

SM

V

GO

OS

E

SM

V

GO

OS

E

GUID-2371EFA7-4369-4F1A-A23F-CF0CE2D474D3 V5 EN

Figure 9: Process bus application of voltage sharing and synchrocheck

The 615 series supports IEC 61850 process bus with sampled values of analogcurrents and voltages. The measured values are transferred as sampled values usingthe IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol which uses the same physical Ethernet network as theIEC 61850-8-1 station bus. The intended application for sampled values is sharing themeasured voltages from one 615 series protection relay to other devices with phasevoltage based functions and 9-2 support.

The 615 series protection relays with process bus based applications use IEEE 1588 v2Precision Time Protocol (PTP) according to IEEE C37.238-2011 Power Profile forhigh accuracy time synchronization. With IEEE 1588 v2, the cabling infrastructurerequirement is reduced by allowing time synchronization information to betransported over the same Ethernet network as the data communications.

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 31Application Manual

Page 38: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

IEC 61850

HSR

SMV

tra

ffic

Backup 1588

master clock

Managed HSR

Ethernet

switch

Primary

IEEE 1588 v2

master clock

Secondary

IEEE 1588 v2

master clock

(optional)

Managed HSR

Ethernet

switch

GUID-7C56BC1F-F1B2-4E74-AB8E-05001A88D53D V5 EN

Figure 10: Example network topology with process bus, redundancy and IEEE1588 v2 time synchronization

The process bus option is available for all 615 series protection relays equipped withphase voltage inputs. Another requirement is a communication card with IEEE 1588v2 support (COM0031...COM0037). However, RED615 supports this option onlywith the communication card variant having fiber optic station bus ports. See the IEC61850 engineering guide for detailed system requirements and configuration details.

2.7.4 Secure communication

The protection relay supports secure communication for WHMI and file transferprotocol. If the Secure Communication parameter is activated, protocols require TLSbased encryption method support from the clients. In this case WHMI must beconnected from a Web browser using the HTTPS protocol and in case of file transferthe client must use FTPS.

2.7.5 Protection communication and supervision

The communication between the relays is enabled by means of a dedicated fiber opticcommunication channel. 1310 nm multi-mode or single-mode fibers with LCconnectors are used for line differential communication. The channel is used fortransferring the phase segregated current value data between the relays. The currentphasors from the two relays, geographically located apart from each other, must betime coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed correctly.The so called echo method is used for time synchronization. No external devices suchas GPS clocks are thereby needed for the line differential protection communication.

Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview

32 RED615Application Manual

Page 39: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Apart from the continued protection communication, the communication channel canalso be used for binary signal transfer (BST) that is, transferring of user configurablebinary information between the relays. There are a total of eight BST signals availablefor user definable purposes. The BST signals can originate from the relay’s binaryinputs or internal logics, and be assigned to the remote relay’s binary outputs orinternal logics.

The protection communication supervision continuously monitors the protectioncommunication link. The relay immediately blocks the line differential protectionfunction in case that severe interference in the communication link, risking the correctoperation of the function, is detected. An alarm signal will eventually be issued if theinterference, indicating permanent failure in the protection communication, persists.The two high-set stages of the overcurrent protection are further by default released.

RED615 RED615

Fibre-optic line differential communication link

Protection communication and supervisionBinary signal transfer

GUID-8CE71CC9-F0EA-4BE9-B693-173CAEA9FA58 V2 EN

Figure 11: Fiber optic protection communication link

1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview

RED615 33Application Manual

Page 40: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

34

Page 41: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Section 3 RED615 standard configurations

3.1 Standard configurations

RED615 is available with five alternative standard configurations. The standardsignal configuration can be altered by means of the signal matrix or the graphicalapplication functionality of the Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600.Further, the application configuration functionality of PCM600 supports the creationof multi-layer logic functions utilizing various logical elements including timers andflip-flops. By combining protection functions with logic function blocks the relayconfiguration can be adapted to user specific application requirements.

The relay is delivered from the factory with default connections described in thefunctional diagrams for binary inputs, binary outputs, function-to-functionconnections and alarm LEDs. Some of the supported functions in RED615 must beadded with the Application Configuration tool to be available in the Signal Matrix tooland in the relay. The positive measuring direction of directional protection functionsis towards the outgoing feeder.

Table 9: Standard configurations

Description Std. conf.Line differential protection A

Line differential protection with directional earth-fault protection and circuit-breakercondition monitoring B

Line differential protection with non-directional earth-fault protection and circuit-breakercondition monitoring C

Line differential protection with directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltageand frequency based protection and measurements, synchro-check and circuit-breakercondition monitoring (RTD option, optional power quality and fault locator)

D

Line differential protection with directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltageand frequency based protection and measurements, and circuit-breaker conditionmonitoring (sensor inputs, optional power quality, fault locator and synchro-check withIEC 61850-9-2 LE)

E

Table 10: Supported functions

Function IEC 61850 A B C D EProtectionThree-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, low stage PHLPTOC 1 1 1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, highstage

PHHPTOC 2 2 2

Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,instantaneous stage

PHIPTOC 1 1 1 1 1

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, low stage DPHLPDOC 2 2Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, high stage DPHHPDOC 1 1

Table continues on next page

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 35Application Manual

Page 42: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Function IEC 61850 A B C D ENon-directional earth-fault protection, low stage EFLPTOC 2 Non-directional earth-fault protection, high stage EFHPTOC 1 Non-directional earth-fault protection, instantaneous stage EFIPTOC 1 Directional earth-fault protection, low stage DEFLPDEF 2 1) 2 2 2)

Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF 1 1) 1 1 2)

Admittance-based earth-fault protection 3) EFPADM (3) 1)3) (3) 3) (3) 2)3)

Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection 3) WPWDE (3) 1)3) (3) 3) (3) 2)3)

Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF 1 1)4) 1 4) 1 2)4)

Harmonics-based earth-fault protection 3) HAEFPTOC (1)3)4) (1) 3)4) (1) 3)4) (1) 3)4)

Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, usingcalculated Io

EFHPTOC 1 1 1

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC 2 2 2 2 2Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC 1 1 1 1Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV 3 1) 3 3 2)

Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 3 3Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3 3Positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV 1 1Negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV 1 1Frequency protection FRPFRQ 4 4Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables anddistribution transformers

T1PTTR 1 1 1 1

Three-phase thermal overload protection, two time constants T2PTTR 1 1 1 1Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO 1 1 1 1 1Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 1 5) 1 1 1 1

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 1 1 1 1 1Switch onto fault CBPSOF 1 1 1 1 1Master trip TRPPTRC 2 2 2 2 2Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC 18 18 18 18 18Fault locator SCEFRFLO (1) (1)Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF 1 1 1 1 1High-impedance fault detection PHIZ 1 1 1 1 Power qualityCurrent total demand distortion CMHAI (1) 6) (1) 6)

Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI (1) 6) (1) 6)

Voltage variation PHQVVR (1) 6) (1) 6)

Voltage unbalance VSQVUB (1) 6) (1) 6)

ControlCircuit-breaker control CBXCBR 1 1 1 1 1Disconnector control DCXSWI 2 2 2 2 2Earthing switch control ESXSWI 1 1 1 1 1Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI 3 3 3 3 3Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI 2 2 2 2 2Autoreclosing DARREC (1) (1) (1) (1)Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN 1 (1) 7)

Condition monitoring and supervisionCircuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 1 1 1 1Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 2 2 2 2 2Current circuit supervision CCSPVC 1 1 1 1 1Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC 1 1Protection communication supervision PCSITPC 1 1 1 1 1Runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT 1 1 1 1 1Measurement

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

36 RED615Application Manual

Page 43: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Function IEC 61850 A B C D EDisturbance recorder RDRE 1 1 1 1 1Load profile record LDPRLRC 1 1 1 1 1Fault record FLTRFRC 1 1 1 1 1Three-phase current measurement CMMXU 1 1 1 1 1Sequence current measurement CSMSQI 1 1 1 1 1Residual current measurement RESCMMXU 1 1 1 1Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU 2 1

(1) 7)

Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU 1 1 Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI 1 1Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU 1 1RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 (1) Frequency measurement FMMXU 1 1

IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value sending 7)8) SMVSENDER (1) (1)

IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value receiving (voltage sharing)7)8)

SMVRCV (1) (1)

OtherMinimum pulse timer (2 pcs) TPGAPC 4 4 4 4 4Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, second resolution) TPSGAPC 1 1 1 1 1Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, minute resolution) TPMGAPC 1 1 1 1 1Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC 2 2 2 2 2Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC 4 4 4 4 4Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC 4 4 4 4 4Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC 4 4 4 4 4Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC 2 2 2 2 2Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC 2 2 2 2 2Analog value scaling (4 pcs) SCA4GAPC 4 4 4 4 4Integer value move (4 pcs) MVI4GAPC 1 1 1 1 11, 2, ... = Number of included instances. The instances of a protection function represent the number of identical protection function blocks available in thestandard configuration.() = optional

1) "Uo measured" is always used.2) "Uo calculated" is always used.3) One of the following can be ordered as an option: admittance-based E/F, wattmetric-based E/F or harmonics-based E/F.4) "Io measured" is always used.5) "Io calculated" is always used.6) Power quality option includes current total demand distortion, voltage total harmonic distortion, voltage variation and voltage unbalance.7) Available only with IEC 61850-9-28) Available only with COM0031...0037

3.1.1 Addition of control functions for primary devices and the useof binary inputs and outputs

If extra control functions intended for controllable primary devices are added to theconfiguration, additional binary inputs and/or outputs are needed to complement thestandard configuration.

If the number of inputs and/or outputs in a standard configuration is not sufficient, itis possible either to modify the chosen standard configuration in order to release somebinary inputs or binary outputs which have originally been configured for otherpurposes, or to integrate an external input/output module, for example RIO600, to theprotection relay.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 37Application Manual

Page 44: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The external I/O module’s binary inputs and outputs can be used for the less time-critical binary signals of the application. The integration enables releasing someinitially reserved binary inputs and outputs of the protection relay’s standardconfiguration.

The suitability of the protection relay’s binary outputs which have been selected forprimary device control should be carefully verified, for example make and carry andbreaking capacity. If the requirements for the primary device control circuit are notmet, using external auxiliary relays should be considered.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

38 RED615Application Manual

Page 45: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.2 Connection diagrams

GUID-7A5D7398-4E4E-4B45-A561-01E3AF4C1640 V1 EN

Figure 12: Connection diagram for the A and C configurations

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 39Application Manual

Page 46: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

GUID-9A18BC7A-D172-4FD4-9C25-BF39C5879E5D V1 EN

Figure 13: Connection diagram for the B configuration

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

40 RED615Application Manual

Page 47: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

RED615

16

17

1918

X100

67

89

10

111213

15

14

2

1

3

45

22

212324

SO2

TCS2

PO4

SO1

TCS1

PO3

PO2

PO1

IRF

+

-Uaux

20

L1L2L3

S1

S2

P1

P2

P2

P1 S1

S2

da dn

X110

34

56

7

89

10BI 6

BI 5

BI 4

BI 3

BI 2

BI 8

BI 712

13

11

BI 112

X110

16

14

15

19

17

18

22

20

21

SO3

SO2

SO1

23SO4

24

a

nN

A

PositiveCurrentDirection

2)

X120

12

3

4

567

89

1011

12

14Io

IL1

IL2

BI 4

BI 3

BI 2

BI 1

IL3

1/5A

N1/5A

N1/5A

N1/5A

N

X13012

34

56

BI 4

BI 3

BI 2

BI 1

87

9101112

U12B

1314

U1

1516

U2

1718

U3

UoN

N

N

N

60 -

N

210V

60 -210V

60 -210V

60 -210V

60 -210V

6)

X1LAN

X5123456789

B/-A/+

/ TX

/ RX

GNDGNDC

X16Line Differential Protection Communication

X2LAN

IRIG-B -IRIG-B +AGND

1) 3)

X12RXTX

1) 3)

1) 4)

1) 5)

B/-A/+

1) Optional2) The IED features an automatic short-circuit mechanism in the CT connector when plug-in unit is detached3) 100BaseFx / LC or 100BaseTx / RJ-454) RS-485 serial bus5) Fibre Optic (ST) Serial Bus6) AIM0006 (5U+4BI) Alternative Module AIM0003 (5U+2RTD+1mA)

GUID-28FB3DA2-5BA8-4041-B17D-80C5B5F17D4D V2 EN

Figure 14: Connection diagram for the D configuration

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 41Application Manual

Page 48: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

RED615

16

17

1918

X100

67

89

10

111213

15

14

2

1

3

45

22

212324

SO2

TCS2

PO4

SO1

TCS1

PO3

PO2

PO1

IRF

+

-Uaux

20

X110

34

56

7

89

10BI 6

BI 5

BI 4

BI 3

BI 2

BI 8

BI 712

13

11

BI 112

X110

16

14

15

19

17

18

22

20

21

SO3

SO2

SO1

23SO4

24

X1LAN

X5123456789

B/-A/+

/ TX

/ RX

GNDGNDC

X16Line Differential Protection Communication

X2LAN

IRIG-B -IRIG-B +AGND

1) 3)

X12RXTX

1) 3)

1) 4)

1) 5)

B/-A/+

1) Optional3) 100BaseFx / LC or 100BaseTx / RJ-454) RS-485 serial bus5) Fibre Optic (ST) Serial Bus

X130

12

X131

45

IL1

78

U1

X132

45

IL2

78

U2

X133

45

IL3

78

U3

Io0,2/1A

N

P2

P1 S1

S2

PositiveCurrentDirection

L1

L2

L3

GUID-D6DCAA04-E7EA-4926-BEED-D7BD476C9142 V1 EN

Figure 15: Connection diagram for the E configuration

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

42 RED615Application Manual

Page 49: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.3 Standard configuration A

3.3.1 Applications

The standard configuration for line current differential protection is intended for cablefeeder applications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for linecurrent differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers.

The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 43Application Manual

Page 50: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.3.2 Functions

RED615 AT REMOTE

END

SOTFSOTF

COMMUNICATION

Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1 Modbus®

IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP

CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION

ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data- Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,

SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI

ORAND

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI

STANDARDCONFIGURATION

RL

ClearESCI

O

Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization

RL

ClearESCI

O

U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr

IL2 0 A

A

With in-zone power transformer supportRED615

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT

Analog interface types 1)

Current transformer

Voltage transformer1) Conventional transformer inputs

Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)

CB

DC

ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs

from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for

primary object3) Status indication function for primary object

1 -

2 3

1 2

- I, Io- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- Symmetrical components

4

-

A

REMARKS

Optionalfunction

No. ofinstances

Alternative function to be defined when ordering

OR

Io/Uo

Calculatedvalue

Sum of phase currents

I∑

PCSPCS

OPTSOPTM

2×TCSTCM

2×I2>46

3I>>>50P/51P

2×Master Trip

Lockout relay94/86

3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF

3I2f>68

3I>51P-1

2×3I>>

51P-23dI>L87L

MCS 3IMCS 3I

BSTBST

PHIZHIZ

18×MAPMAP

3I

IoI∑

3I

GUID-78F52211-9D37-4A2F-9527-CD61BDEA68A2 V2 EN

Figure 16: Functionality overview for standard configuration A

3.3.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

44 RED615Application Manual

Page 51: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Table 11: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input DescriptionX110-BI2 External start of breaker failure protection

X110-BI3 Setting group change

X110-BI4 Binary signal transfer input

X110-BI5 Disconnector open/truck in

X110-BI6 Disconnector open/truck out

X110-BI7 Earth-switch close

X110-BI8 Earth-switch open

X120-BI1 Blocking input for general use

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker close

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open

X120-BI4 Lockout reset

Table 12: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker

X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker

X100-SO1 Line differential protection trip alarm

X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip 1

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip 2

X110- SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking

X110- SO2 Backup protection operated

X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal

Table 13: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description1 Line differential protection biased stage operate

2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate

3 Line differential protection is not available

4 Protection communication failure

5 Current transformer failure detected

6 Phase or negative sequence component over current

7 Breaker failure operate

8 Disturbance recorder triggered

9 Trip circuit supervision alarm

10 Binary signal transfer receive

11 Binary signal transfer send

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 45Application Manual

Page 52: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.3.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 14: Default disturbance recorder analog channels

Channel Description1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 -

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Table 15: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising

2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising

3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

4 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

5 PHHPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising

6 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

7 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

8 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising

9 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off

10 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off

11 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

PHHPTOC1 - operate

PHHPTOC2 - operate

PHLPTOC1 - operate

12 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate

13 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off

14 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off

15 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off

16 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

46 RED615Application Manual

Page 53: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Channel ID text Level trigger mode28 X110BI4 - binary transfer Level trigger off

29 X110BI2 - ext ccbrbrf start Level trigger off

30 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off

31 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off

32 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off

3.3.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.

The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from a current transformer. Theresidual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected CTs, anexternal core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.

The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.

3.3.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.

The line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intendedto be the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings, if ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration, itis activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and earth-switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate position. The intention of thisconnection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by multiplyingwith the setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to afailure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 47Application Manual

Page 54: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuitprotection. Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PHIPTOC1 can beblocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1. The instantaneous and first highstage are blocked by activation of line differential protection.

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

NOTIN OUT

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS

OPERATESTART

STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY

LNPLDF1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAIL

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

REMOTE_CB_OPEN

REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF_BLKD2H

LNPLDF1_START

GUID-214BD8DC-0A09-4BD2-BF07-0AD63322734C V2 EN

Figure 17: Line differential protection functions

PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHLPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHHPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

ORB1B2

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

PHIPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC2_START

PHxPTOC_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_START

GUID-1EC75CEC-F8EC-4181-9EA6-B077515E9347 V1 EN

Figure 18: Overcurrent protection functions

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

48 RED615Application Manual

Page 55: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The upstream blocking both from the start of the instantaneous and the high stageovercurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. Thisoutput can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protectionstage of the IED at the upstream bay.

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_START

GUID-53A4ACB1-873E-4AA6-A478-536C7BA0E03F V1 EN

Figure 19: Upstream blocking logic

The output BLK2H of the three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers thepossibility to either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of theavailable overcurrent function blocks.

INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-76C18EB4-E3EC-427D-B47A-9E1BFD2DBA5E V1 EN

Figure 20: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance. Both the negative-sequence overcurrent protectionfunctions are blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of currenttransformer.

NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

ORB1B2

O

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

CCSPVC1_FAIL

CCSPVC1_FAIL

NSPTOC_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2_START

GUID-80E6D94D-4D46-4B79-8383-3C6C3577E763 V2 EN

Figure 21: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 49Application Manual

Page 56: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The overcurrent protection and negative-sequence overcurrentprotection are used as backup protection against line differentialprotection.

The backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2which can be used for external alarm purposes.

The circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input bynumber of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breakerfailure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuitbreaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breakerfeeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to thebinary output X100:PO2.

CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_ALTRBU

TRRET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START

GUID-ED51D248-8DD6-45C2-8B99-8A4885023125 V1 EN

Figure 22: Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available atbinary outputs X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided witha lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting.If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4 can be assigned toRST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OTRPPTRC1_TRIP

PHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATEX120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUTGUID-8768D080-5A99-4E2D-8E01-FDD152866526 V1 EN

Figure 23: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

50 RED615Application Manual

Page 57: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OTRPPTRC2_TRIP

PHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUTCCBRBRF1_TRRET

GUID-8EC8BF92-8C1B-4315-A462-6A661E013089 V1 EN

Figure 24: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.3.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.

RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64

TRIGGERED

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFERX110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

PCSITPC1_ALARM

PHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_STARTPHLPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START

LNPLDF_BLKD2H

LNPLDF1_START DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

GUID-7A54A97D-ED30-4EF9-A3CF-F0F21EA72AAB V2 EN

Figure 25: Disturbance recorder

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 51Application Manual

Page 58: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.3.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure isdetected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measure thecalculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessaryoperation.

CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL

ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-3C8B9191-F624-40FF-BE4E-54B68FC6760F V2 EN

Figure 26: Current circuit supervision function

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions areblocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker opensignal.

It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM

TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM

ORB1B2

O

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_ALARM

GUID-35D08B4E-51FC-4118-AD4C-0C046AA23550 V1 EN

Figure 27: Trip circuit supervision function

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

52 RED615Application Manual

Page 59: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OTRPPTRC2_TRIP

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

TRPPTRC1_TRIP TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-5EF1437A-0FC1-43BD-8BCA-4525748A3F10 V1 EN

Figure 28: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration toblock the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of theline differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs duringprotection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally withoutconnections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarmis connected to alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.

PCSITPC1OK

WARNINGALARMCOMM

PCSITPC1_ALARM

GUID-1C5B59EA-A7A6-4ED4-AA51-392008C46EBA V2 EN

Figure 29: Protection communication supervision

Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binary information whichcan be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking and alarms. There areeight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI4 is connected to the binary signaltransfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO inputs 6 and 7. These are interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected toinput 8.

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs. Also the remote binary transfer output signal is connected tothe binary output X110:SO3.

BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY

CCSPVC1_FAIL

X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_ABSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-6E428F3A-5652-4573-BFEC-71E5893CE434 V2 EN

Figure 30: Binary signal transfer

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 53Application Manual

Page 60: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.3.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in thestandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.

DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

GUID-42D1B156-F8DC-47AE-8B49-689E1A4F9930 V1 EN

Figure 31: Disconnector 1 control logic

ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI8_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

GUID-1FCBEC78-041D-49E7-8440-F24B71B0979E V1 EN

Figure 32: Earth-switch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breakertruck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for thecircuit breaker is always enabled.

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.

CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP

SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL

OP_REQCL_REQ

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOSOPEN_ENAD

CLOSE_ENAD

FALSE

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP

TRUE

CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

GUID-0644C4E5-EBFA-477B-90B0-7D22E168972A V2 EN

Figure 33: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

54 RED615Application Manual

Page 61: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.

ORB1B2

O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CL

GUID-31AF7051-A62F-4596-B317-36090DEE3235 V1 EN

Figure 34: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CB_OPEN_COMMANDTRPPTRC1_TRIPCBXCBR1_EXE_OP

GUID-444B84F9-F5D9-4BA4-9EDC-344CD77F0ED7 V1 EN

Figure 35: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

ANDB1B2

O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSEREMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY

NOTIN OUT

AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

NOTIN OUTTRPPTRC2_TRIP

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

LOCAL_FEEDER_READYDCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

GUID-48415567-5620-4D8C-BEDE-545846CBAB67 V1 EN

Figure 36: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 55Application Manual

Page 62: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-546ECBD3-B766-45AF-9FF5-948DCA545C6F V1 EN

Figure 37: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-361E5BC0-42E9-49D8-ABCE-8677BFA017A1 V1 EN

Figure 38: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.3.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent.

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available by using themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.

The load profile record function LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet.LDPRLRC1 offers the ability to observe the loading history of the correspondingfeeder.

CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN

LOW_ALARM

GUID-8B4CEF31-8A1D-40B8-9FCB-E9D2905CA6D5 V1 EN

Figure 39: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-60EF9EC2-4E85-4236-A57D-4D663A2B340A V1 EN

Figure 40: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

56 RED615Application Manual

Page 63: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD

GUID-7680B583-F7CC-4C51-B4F4-07071AA72925 V2 EN

Figure 41: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN

MEM_ALARM

GUID-D1F501B2-6430-4E72-A889-3B5838D45918 V2 EN

Figure 42: Other measurement: Load profile record

3.3.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI3_SG_CHANGE

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED

X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8GUID-5FB90F71-13E8-4A40-8F9E-EB5131350578 V1 EN

Figure 43: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4GUID-02B39637-DED0-4D63-A9FE-A4FB30994B9E V1 EN

Figure 44: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 57Application Manual

Page 64: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-SO1

X110 (BIO).X110-SO2

X110 (BIO).X110-SO3GUID-65B379D4-FE8D-45EC-8ACF-933E37B249F5 V1 EN

Figure 45: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE

LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

CB_OPEN_COMMAND

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-1D17D025-275D-47B2-90D0-F95635D6CEFD V1 EN

Figure 46: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

58 RED615Application Manual

Page 65: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED1OKALARMRESET

LED2OKALARMRESET

LED3OKALARMRESET

LED4OKALARMRESET

LED5OKALARMRESET

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

PCSITPC1_ALARM

CCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-DAF8EA20-89B5-48D6-B6E7-5B844BFD7A7B V2 EN

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 59Application Manual

Page 66: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED6OKALARMRESET

LED7OKALARMRESET

LED8OKALARMRESET

LED9OKALARMRESET

LED10OKALARMRESET

LED11OKALARMRESET

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A

BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

TCSSCBR_ALARM

GUID-8A7C2989-86B4-40D7-871F-4AFCB28E598D V2 EN

Figure 47: Default LED connection

3.3.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics

The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication andbackup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimumpulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. Theoutput from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

TPGAPC1IN1IN2

OUT1OUT2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSELNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATELNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVEPCSITPC1_ALARM

GUID-F96BFC4E-C609-4176-901A-5B9EEC2CFAA9 V2 EN

Figure 48: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

60 RED615Application Manual

Page 67: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TPGAPC2IN1IN2

OUT1OUT2

ORB1B2

O

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

PHxPTOC_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

GUID-CB98021B-214D-4A49-816D-91CDE2D603C1 V1 EN

Figure 49: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

3.3.3.8 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,high impedance fault detection PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devicesMDSOPT and few instances of different types of timers and control functions. Thesefunctions are not included in application configuration but they can be added based onthe system requirements.

3.4 Standard configuration B

3.4.1 Applications

The standard configuration for line current differential protection includingdirectional earth-fault protection and autoreclosing is mainly intended for cable feederapplications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for line currentdifferential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. The configurationalso includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection based onadmittance, wattmetric or harmonic principles.

The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 61Application Manual

Page 68: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.4.2 Functions

RED615 AT REMOTE

END

SOTFSOTF

COMMUNICATION

Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1 Modbus®

IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP

CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION

ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data- Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,

SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI

ORAND

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI

STANDARDCONFIGURATION

RL

ClearESCI

O

Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization

RL

ClearESCI

O

U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr

IL2 0 A

A

With in-zone power transformer supportRED615 B

3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT

Analog interface types 1)

Current transformer

Voltage transformer1) Conventional transformer inputs

Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)

CB

DC

ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs

from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for

primary object3) Status indication function for primary object

1 -

2 3

1 2

- I, Io, Uo- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- Symmetrical components

4

1

O→I79

REMARKS

Optionalfunction

No. ofinstances

Alternative function to be defined when ordering

OR

Io/Uo

Calculatedvalue

2×I2>46

I2/I1>46PD

3Ith>F49F

3I>>>50P/51P

2×Master Trip

Lockout relay94/86

2×Io>→67N-1

Io>>→67N-2

Io>IEF→67NIEF

3×Uo>59G

Io>>51N-2

3I>51P-1

3I2f>68

3×Yo>→21YN

3×Po>→32N

OR

2×3I>>

51P-2CBCMCBCM

OPTSOPTM

2×TCSTCM

MCS 3IMCS 3I

PCSPCS

BSTBST

3dI>L87L

Io>HA51NHA

OR

PHIZHIZ

18×MAPMAP

3Ith>T/G/C49T/G/C

3I

Uo

Uo

Io

Io

Io

3I

GUID-6AB801FF-A43F-40D6-8D70-D27EF2F402B0 V2 EN

Figure 50: Functionality overview for standard configuration B

3.4.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

62 RED615Application Manual

Page 69: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Table 16: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input DescriptionX110-BI1 Lockout reset

X110-BI2 Binary signal transfer input

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (service position) indication

X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication

X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication

X120-BI1 Blocking input for general use

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker close

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open

Table 17: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker

X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker

X100-SO1 Line differential protection trip alarm

X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip 1

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip 2

X110- SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking

X110- SO2 Backup protection operated

X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal

Table 18: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description1 Line differential protection biased stage operate

2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate

3 Line differential protection is not available

4 Protection communication failure

5 Autoreclose in progress

6 Backup protection operated

7 Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate

8 Disturbance recorder triggered

9 Current transformer failure or trip circuit or circuit breaker supervision

10 Binary signal transfer receive

11 Binary signal transfer send

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 63Application Manual

Page 70: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.4.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 19: Default disturbance recorder analog channels

Channel Description1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 Uo

6 -

7 -

8 -

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Table 20: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising

2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising

3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

4 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

5 PHHPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising

6 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

7 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising

8 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising

9 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

10 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

11 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising

12 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

13 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising

WPWDE1 - start

EFPADM1 - start

14 DEFLPDEF2 - start Positive or Rising

WPWDE2 - start

EFPADM2 - start

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

64 RED615Application Manual

Page 71: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Channel ID text Level trigger mode15 DEFLPDEF3 - start Positive or Rising

WPWDE3 - start

EFPADM3 - start

16 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising

17 ROVPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising

18 ROVPTOV3 - start Positive or Rising

19 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising

20 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off

21 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off

22 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off

23 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off

24 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

PHHPTOC1 - operate

PHHPTOC2 - operate

PHLPTOC1 - operate

25 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate

26 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off

WPWDE1 - operate

EFPADM1 - operate

DEFLPDEF2 - operate

WPWDE2 - operate

EFPADM2 - operate

DEFLPDEF3 - operate

WPWDE3 - operate

EFPADM3 - operate

27 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off

ROVPTOV2 - operate

ROVPTOV3 - operate

28 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

29 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off

T2PTTR2 - operate

30 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off

31 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off

32 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off

33 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off

34 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off

35 X110BI4 - CB spring charged Level trigger off

36 X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 65Application Manual

Page 72: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Channel ID text Level trigger mode37 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off

38 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off

39 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off

40 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off

DARREC1 - close CB

41 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off

3.4.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.

The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from a current transformer. Theresidual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected CTs, anexternal core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.

The residual voltage to the protection relay is fed from either residually connectedVTs or an open delta connected VT.

The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.

3.4.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.

Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended tobe the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,the input is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breakerand earth-switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intentionof this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage bymultiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

66 RED615Application Manual

Page 73: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to afailure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.

Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuitprotection. The three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneousstage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input X120: BI1. Theinstantaneous and first high stage are blocked by activation of line differentialprotection.

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

NOTIN OUT

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS

OPERATESTART

STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY

LNPLDF1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAIL

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

REMOTE_CB_OPEN

REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF_BLKD2H

LNPLDF1_START

GUID-AD84AF5C-400B-41C3-91D6-949E65CAA3AF V2 EN

Figure 51: Line differential protection functions

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 67Application Manual

Page 74: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHLPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHHPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

ORB1B2

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

PHIPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC2_START

PHxPTOC_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_START

GUID-548C92CC-518C-48A8-B87B-EED122805E8C V1 EN

Figure 52: Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking both from the start of the instantaneous as well as the highstage overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1.This output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protectionstage of the IED at the upstream bay.

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_START

GUID-4B78CBAB-A4CD-4E1D-A881-CB07EB4B9E98 V1 EN

Figure 53: Upstream blocking logic

Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the ordercode, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on conventionaldirectional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together withadmittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM or wattmetric-based earth-faultprotection WPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. Inaddition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-basedearth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensatednetworks.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

68 RED615Application Manual

Page 75: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

DEFHPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

DEFLPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

DEFLPDEF2BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

DEFxPDEF_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_START

DEFLPDEF2_START

DEFHPDEF1_START

GUID-7CE4340B-32CA-4C2A-BD23-B658F983AC26 V1 EN

Figure 54: Directional earth-fault protection

INTRPTEF1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTBLK_EF

INTRPTEF1_OPERATEINTRPTEF1_START

GUID-0F6D8EB0-A3F2-4998-8606-5B437F3B1FF6 V1 EN

Figure 55: Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection function

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 69Application Manual

Page 76: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

WPWDE1BLOCKRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

WPWDE2BLOCKRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

WPWDE3BLOCKRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

WPWDE1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATE

WPWDE3_OPERATE

WPWDE3_OPERATE

WPWDE1_START

WPWDE2_START

WPWDE3_START

WPWDE_OPERATE

GUID-3C742FD7-5543-44A2-8067-FE696CEA8382 V1 EN

Figure 56: Wattmetric protection

EFPADM1BLOCKRELEASE

OPERATESTART

EFPADM2BLOCKRELEASE

OPERATESTART

EFPADM3BLOCKRELEASE

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

EFPADM1_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATE

EFPADM3_OPERATE

EFPADM3_OPERATE

EFPADM1_START

EFPADM2_START

EFPADM3_START

EFPADM_OPERATE

GUID-7BF18144-47E9-4893-9483-3FAEF7305665 V1 EN

Figure 57: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

70 RED615Application Manual

Page 77: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Non-directional earth-fault protection EFHPTOC protects against double earth-faultsituations in isolated or compensated networks.

EFHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

EFHPTOC1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAILEFHPTOC1_START

GUID-1940E3D0-47D5-43EE-83A8-D168E00149B9 V2 EN

Figure 58: Cross-country earth-fault protection

The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility toeither block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the availableovercurrent function blocks.

INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-692057DE-53FB-46D9-89A7-F1EFF039261B V1 EN

Figure 59: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance. The negative-sequence overcurrent protectionfunctions are blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of currenttransformer.

NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

ORB1B2

O

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

CCSPVC1_FAIL

CCSPVC1_FAIL

NSPTOC_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2_START

GUID-10D0C21D-0607-411C-82D7-8F610AD9A94D V2 EN

Figure 60: Negative sequence overcurrent protection function

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in thenormal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. Thefunction is blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of currenttransformer.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 71Application Manual

Page 78: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

PDNSPTOC1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTPDNSPTOC1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAILPDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-2B586B9A-9BB7-40F7-81CD-5F3DF685AA47 V2 EN

Figure 61: Phase discontinuity protection

Two three-phase thermal protection functions are incorporated, one with one timeconstant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detectingoverloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function isused to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.

T1PTTR1BLK_OPRENA_MULTTEMP_AMB

OPERATESTARTALARM

BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1BLOCKTEMP_AMB

OPERATESTARTALARM

BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_START

T2PTTR1_ALARM

T1PTTR1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_START

GUID-FF27FA66-67F0-4C88-9082-B40763180076 V1 EN

Figure 62: Thermal overcurrent protection function

The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection bydetecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as anonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

72 RED615Application Manual

Page 79: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ROVPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE

START

ROVPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE

START

ROVPTOV3BLOCK OPERATE

START

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE

ROVPTOV2_OPERATE

ROVPTOV2_OPERATE

ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

ROVPTOV3_OPERATE

ROVPTOV1_START

ROVPTOV2_START

ROVPTOV3_START

ROVPTOV_OPERATE

GUID-C3B58F13-0F77-423E-9130-33D80079CD37 V1 EN

Figure 63: Residual voltage protection function

It should be noted that overcurrent protection, negative sequence overcurrentprotection, phase discontinuity, earth-fault protection and residual overvoltageprotections are all used as backup protection against line differential protection. Thebackup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2 whichcan be used for external alarm purpose.

The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signalsfrom a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. It is possible tocreate individual autoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connectedto the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command fromthe autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas closecommand is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 73Application Manual

Page 80: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

DARREC1INIT_1INIT_2INIT_3INIT_4INIT_5INIT_6DEL_INIT_2DEL_INIT_3DEL_INIT_4BLK_RECL_TBLK_RCLM_TBLK_THERMCB_POSCB_READYINC_SHOTPINHIBIT_RECLRECL_ONSYNC

OPEN_CBCLOSE_CBCMD_WAIT

INPROLOCKED

PROT_CRDUNSUC_RECL

AR_ONREADYACTIVE

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

DARREC1_OPEN_CBDARREC1_CLOSE_CB

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATE

EFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATE

WPWDE3_OPERATE

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

CBXCBR1_SELECTED

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

DARREC1_INPRO

GUID-1002F280-77C3-4183-9D8C-C1A9491EA948 V1 EN

Figure 64: Autoreclosing function

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by anumber of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breakerfailure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuitbreaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breakerfeeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to thebinary output X100:PO2.

CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_ALTRBU

TRRET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATEPDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

GUID-FEC1A53B-56F4-47AB-93E0-9E6E8BD69CEF V1 EN

Figure 65: Circuit breaker failure protection function

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

74 RED615Application Manual

Page 81: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available atbinary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with alockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. Ifthe lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X110:BI1 can be assigned toRST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC1_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATEROVPTOV3_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATEWPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

EFHPTOC1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

GUID-314936ED-1932-452F-AD19-785984517B0B V1 EN

Figure 66: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 75Application Manual

Page 82: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC2_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATEROVPTOV3_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

GUID-30C131EA-7088-46A1-B58F-8F138563EA94 V1 EN

Figure 67: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.4.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

76 RED615Application Manual

Page 83: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64

TRIGGERED

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARMX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

ROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATEROVPTOV3_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

PCSITPC1_ALARM

PHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_STARTPHLPTOC1_START

T1PTTR1_START

DEFLPDEF1_START

DEFLPDEF2_START

DEFHPDEF1_START

WPWDE1_STARTEFPADM1_START

EFPADM2_START

EFPADM3_START

WPWDE2_START

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

WPWDE3_START

DARREC1_INPRO

CCSPVC1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_ALARMT1PTTR1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_STARTPDNSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START

EFHPTOC1_START

ROVPTOV1_STARTROVPTOV2_STARTROVPTOV3_STARTINTRPTEF1_START

LNPLDF_BLKD2H

LNPLDF1_START DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

GUID-268B3D85-D897-488A-9B7F-8494B63DCF50 V2 EN

Figure 68: Disturbance recorder

3.4.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failure in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is detected,it can be used to block current protection functions that measure calculated sequencecomponent currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary operation.

CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL

ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-5078A248-6EC5-4061-AE60-1AD139C07EFC V2 EN

Figure 69: Current circuit supervision function

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based onthe connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1introduces various supervision methods.

Set parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 77Application Manual

Page 84: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

SSCBR1BLOCKPOSOPENPOSCLOSEOPEN_CB_EXECLOSE_CB_EXEPRES_ALM_INPRES_LO_INSPR_CHR_STSPR_CHRRST_IPOWRST_CB_WEARRST_TRV_TRST_SPR_T

TRV_T_OP_ALMTRV_T_CL_ALMSPR_CHR_ALM

OPR_ALMOPR_LO

IPOW_ALMIPOW_LO

CB_LIFE_ALMMON_ALM

PRES_ALMPRES_LO

OPENPOSINVALIDPOSCLOSEPOS

CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCB_OPEN_COMMAND

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGEDCB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LOSSCBR1_IPOW_ALMSSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALMSSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_LO

GUID-C245CA67-6353-4AC0-B004-FF962F2DE242 V1 EN

Figure 70: Circuit-breaker condition monitoring function

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM

SSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LO

SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM

SSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM

SSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALM

SSCBR1_PRES_LO

SSCBR1_ALARMS

GUID-5B9CD6B2-864D-446E-AF08-FB69DB807E65 V1 EN

Figure 71: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm

NOTIN OUTX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-55A52E9F-8B13-49D9-8882-756A5476E72E V1 EN

Figure 72: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions areblocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker opensignal.

It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.

Set parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

78 RED615Application Manual

Page 85: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM

TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM

ORB1B2

O

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_ALARM

GUID-DECD965E-2872-41A6-B046-BAC70B2833C7 V1 EN

Figure 73: Trip circuit supervision function

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OTRPPTRC2_TRIP

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

TRPPTRC1_TRIP TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-DC549599-4B1C-494B-BB34-F56026644379 V1 EN

Figure 74: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration toblock the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of theline differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs duringprotection communication failure also blocked. These are done internally withoutconnections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarmis connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.

PCSITPC1OK

WARNINGALARMCOMM

PCSITPC1_ALARM

GUID-BAE83A0F-1C32-43F4-B77B-B7EE8CDBFCE8 V2 EN

Figure 75: Protection communication supervision function

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binaryinformation which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking andalarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signaltransfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO1 inputs 6 and 7. These are interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected to theinput 8.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 79Application Manual

Page 86: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs. Also the remote binary transfer output signal is connected tothe binary output X110:SO3.

BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY

CCSPVC1_FAIL

X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_ABSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-4AEBA6EE-A7A7-420D-81C4-332109FA18D2 V2 EN

Figure 76: Binary signal transfer function

3.4.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in thestandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.

DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

GUID-F19F7A81-7B9B-412C-BC89-B389307012A5 V1 EN

Figure 77: Disconnector 1 control logic

ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI8_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

GUID-0496B254-C7CF-420D-86DD-E625012BF389 V1 EN

Figure 78: Earth-switch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether the disconnector or circuitbreaker truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for thecircuit breaker is always enabled.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

80 RED615Application Manual

Page 87: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the breaker closing in the local IED.

Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.

CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP

SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL

OP_REQCL_REQ

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOSOPEN_ENAD

CLOSE_ENAD

TRUE

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP

CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSEFALSE

CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

CBXCBR1_SELECTED

GUID-96E28E0A-0306-450B-8B90-2923AC1F47B5 V2 EN

Figure 79: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

ORB1B2

O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CLDARREC1_CLOSE_CB

GUID-8A675478-7A5A-496D-A943-0EA4BACA6900 V1 EN

Figure 80: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

GUID-AE6AFF59-FED2-40E5-BDD0-48ED49F694FF V1 EN

Figure 81: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 81Application Manual

Page 88: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ANDB1B2

O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSEREMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY

NOTIN OUT

AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

NOTIN OUT

NOTIN OUT

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

GUID-70637FEC-196D-40FB-950B-EA9698FD2121 V1 EN

Figure 82: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuitbreaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature ofthe function.

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSET1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSET2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-84F804B6-C264-4302-9A95-2E3F49094559 V1 EN

Figure 83: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-8D2F88B3-A27B-4E69-A02E-D52176525437 V1 EN

Figure 84: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

82 RED615Application Manual

Page 89: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-5C8FB700-8CA1-49AB-A7B4-D6FA09B5EDF2 V1 EN

Figure 85: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.4.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residualcurrent.

The residual voltage input is connected to the X120 card in the back panel and ismeasured by the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1.

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.

Load profile record LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.

CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN

LOW_ALARM

GUID-9F56B67F-3575-4B74-8AA5-3E21C345A348 V1 EN

Figure 86: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-5D25FB19-03A1-4219-9646-46D3EB75497F V1 EN

Figure 87: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

RESCMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARN

GUID-D7D2CA02-D35D-4A2E-B58A-4DBC24284EF3 V1 EN

Figure 88: Current measurement: Residual current measurement

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 83Application Manual

Page 90: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

RESVMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARN

GUID-302309FA-D627-4EB9-A5AF-3C5C3DACBB6F V1 EN

Figure 89: Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurement

FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD

GUID-3E9B8AE8-FAF5-47CA-BB9F-F8156E3C78C6 V2 EN

Figure 90: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN

MEM_ALARM

GUID-D112C16E-7F50-4D49-960A-D38864F4724D V2 EN

Figure 91: Other measurement: Load profile record

3.4.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED

X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8GUID-C41ADC88-88C5-4472-A2A2-8786CCF6F829 V1 EN

Figure 92: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

84 RED615Application Manual

Page 91: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3GUID-676FEBEB-5405-478E-AE6A-2B67ECA8ABBB V1 EN

Figure 93: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-SO1

X110 (BIO).X110-SO2

X110 (BIO).X110-SO3GUID-B36EC7FB-6FD6-43C4-8EE4-D4FA8D6F6874 V1 EN

Figure 94: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE

LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

CB_OPEN_COMMAND

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-47B2D69C-8123-4C8F-B991-23B7CF6203FE V1 EN

Figure 95: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 85Application Manual

Page 92: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED1OKALARMRESET

LED2OKALARMRESET

LED3OKALARMRESET

LED4OKALARMRESET

LED5OKALARMRESET

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

PCSITPC1_ALARM

DARREC1_INPRO

GUID-C6F6FBBA-3D33-45E5-9ECA-D7B16B8A44CE V2 EN

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

86 RED615Application Manual

Page 93: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED6OKALARMRESET

LED7OKALARMRESET

LED8OKALARMRESET

LED9OKALARMRESET

LED10OKALARMRESET

LED11OKALARMRESET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

CCSPVC1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_ALARMT1PTTR1_ALARM

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A

BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

SSCBR1_ALARMS

TCSSCBR_ALARM

GUID-7B65F94B-1348-4472-9495-AD53803043D3 V2 EN

Figure 96: Default LED connection

3.4.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics

The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication andbackup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimumpulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. Theoutput from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

TPGAPC1IN1IN2

OUT1OUT2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSELNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATELNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVEPCSITPC1_ALARM

GUID-7ECCC7B0-4347-46C0-B3D1-AF4C7B1F8430 V2 EN

Figure 97: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 87Application Manual

Page 94: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TPGAPC2IN1IN2

OUT1OUT2

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

PHxPTOC_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE

DEFxPDEF_OPERATE

EFPDAM_OPERATE

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

WPWDE_OPERATEROVPTOV_OPERATE

GUID-65003347-878B-49F5-A451-4EE2F7061C1A V1 EN

Figure 98: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

3.4.3.8 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection functionMAPGAPC, harmonics-based earth-fault protection, high-impedance fault detectionfunction PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and fewinstances of different types of timers and control functions. These functions are notincluded in application configuration but they can be added based on the systemrequirements.

3.5 Standard configuration C

3.5.1 Applications

The standard configuration for line current differential protection including non-directional earth-fault protection and autoreclosing is mainly intended for cable feederapplications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for line currentdifferential protection includes support for in-zone transformers.

The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

88 RED615Application Manual

Page 95: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.5.2 Functions

RED615 AT REMOTE

END

ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data- Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,

SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI

ORAND

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI

STANDARDCONFIGURATION

REMARKS

Optionalfunction

No. ofinstances

Alternative function to be defined when ordering

OR

Io/Uo

Calculatedvalue

RL

ClearESCI

O

Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization

RL

ClearESCI

O

U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr

IL2 0 A

A

With in-zone power transformer supportRED615 C

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT

Analog interface types 1)

Current transformer

Voltage transformer1) Conventional transformer inputs

Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)

CB

DC

ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs

from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for

primary object3) Status indication function for primary object

1 -

2 3

1 2

- I, Io- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- Symmetrical components

4

-

O→I79

2×Master Trip

Lockout relay94/86

Io>>51N-2

BSTBST

Io>HA51NHA

3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF

2×I2>46

I2/I1>46PD

3Ith>F49F

3I>>>50P/51P

3I>51P-1

3I2f>68

2×3I>>

51P-23dI>L87L

SOTFSOTF

18×MAPMAP

COMMUNICATION

Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1 Modbus®

IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP

CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION

OPTSOPTM

2×TCSTCM

MCS 3IMCS 3I

PCSPCS

CBCMCBCM

PHIZHIZ

Io>>>50N/51N

2×Io>

51N-1

3Ith>T/G/C49T/G/C

3I

Io

Io

Io

3I

GUID-C4999021-E1FE-4D55-AB91-FC7C6963501B V2 EN

Figure 99: Functionality overview for standard configuration C

3.5.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 89Application Manual

Page 96: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Table 21: Default connections for binary inputs

Binary input DescriptionX110-BI1 External start of breaker failure protection

X110-BI2 Binary signal transfer input

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (service position) indication

X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication

X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication

X120-BI1 Blocking input for general use

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker close

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open

X120-BI4 Lockout reset

Table 22: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker

X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker

X100-SO1 Line differential protection trip alarm

X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available

X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip 1

X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip 2

X110- SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking

X110- SO2 Backup protection operated

X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal

Table 23: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description1 Line differential protection biased stage operate

2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate

3 Line differential protection is not available

4 Protection communication failure

5 Autoreclose in progress

6 Backup protection operated

7 Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate

8 Disturbance recorder triggered

9 Current transformer failure or trip circuit or circuit breaker supervision

10 Binary signal transfer receive

11 Binary signal transfer send

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

90 RED615Application Manual

Page 97: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.5.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 24: Default disturbance recorder analog channels

Channel Description1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 -

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Table 25: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising

2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising

3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

4 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

5 PHHPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising

6 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

7 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising

8 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising

9 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

10 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

11 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising

12 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

13 EFIPTOC1- start Positive or Rising

14 EFLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

15 EFLPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising

16 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off

17 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off

18 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off

19 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 91Application Manual

Page 98: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Channel ID text Level trigger mode20 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

PHHPTOC1 - operate

PHHPTOC2 - operate

PHLPTOC1 - operate

21 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate

22 T1PTTR1- operate Level trigger off

T2PTTR2 - operate

23 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

24 EFIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

EFHPTOC1 - operate

EFLPTOC1 - operate

EFLPTOC2 - operate

25 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off

26 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off

27 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off

28 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off

29 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off

30 X110BI4 - CB spring charged Level trigger off

31 X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm Level trigger off

32 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off

33 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off

34 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off

35 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off

DARREC1 - close CB

36 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off

3.5.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.

The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from a current transformer. Theresidual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected CTs, anexternal core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

92 RED615Application Manual

Page 99: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.

3.5.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.

Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended tobe the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configurationit is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker andearth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention ofthis connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage bymultiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to afailure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.

Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuitprotection. Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage,PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1. Theinstantaneous and first high stages are blocked by activation of line differentialprotection.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 93Application Manual

Page 100: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

NOTIN OUT

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS

OPERATESTART

STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY

LNPLDF1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAIL

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

REMOTE_CB_OPEN

REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF_BLKD2H

LNPLDF1_START

GUID-95B0A554-5C39-4F26-A640-F78788B2FA00 V2 EN

Figure 100: Line differential protection functions

PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHLPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHHPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

ORB1B2

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING INRPHAR1_BLK2HLNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

PHIPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC1_START

PHHPTOC2_START

PHxPTOC_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_START

Grouped function operate

B

GUID-27D40A12-2206-4ADE-AA31-9366909740BF V1 EN

Figure 101: Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high stageovercurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. Thisoutput can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protectionstage of the IED at the upstream bay.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

94 RED615Application Manual

Page 101: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_START

GUID-FFE28D0E-8985-4E5C-A14B-CB6DE0B30D72 V1 EN

Figure 102: Upstream blocking logic

Four stages are provided for non-directional earth-fault protection. According to theorder code, the configuration can also include optional harmonics-based earth-faultprotection HAEFPTOC1. On detection of current circuit failure, all earth-faultfunctions are blocked to inhibit unwanted operation, which can occur due to apparentresidual current.

EFHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

EFIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

EFLPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

EFLPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

EFIPTOC1_OPERATE

EFIPTOC1_OPERATE

EFLPTOC1_OPERATE

EFLPTOC1_OPERATE

EFLPTOC2_OPERATE

EFLPTOC2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

CCSPVC1_FAIL

CCSPVC1_FAIL

CCSPVC1_FAIL

CCSPVC1_FAIL

EFxPTOC_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_START

EFIPTOC1_START

EFLPTOC1_START

EFLPTOC2_START

GUID-0E48EAFB-CE67-46B6-88A8-59B4957D7E5B V2 EN

Figure 103: Earth-fault protection functions

The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility toeither block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the availableovercurrent function blocks.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 95Application Manual

Page 102: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-7F2BFC97-5C00-40C0-ABBA-3FC501D58D5D V1 EN

Figure 104: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance. The negative sequence overcurrent protections areblocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.

NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

ORB1B2

O

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

CCSPVC1_FAIL

CCSPVC1_FAIL

NSPTOC_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2_START

GUID-3DF9A5C8-F9D5-44B7-BBF6-23B50666086B V2 EN

Figure 105: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection function

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in thenormal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. Thefunction is blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of currenttransformer.

PDNSPTOC1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTPDNSPTOC1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAILPDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-74381B2D-CA6F-445F-A1CC-6096EC6AA562 V2 EN

Figure 106: Phase discontinuity protection

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one timeconstant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detectingoverloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function isused to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

96 RED615Application Manual

Page 103: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

T1PTTR1BLK_OPRENA_MULTTEMP_AMB

OPERATESTARTALARM

BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1BLOCKTEMP_AMB

OPERATESTARTALARM

BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_START

T2PTTR1_ALARM

T1PTTR1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_START

GUID-C71ADCD1-5E9F-47CF-AF75-D8CD007C423A V1 EN

Figure 107: Thermal overcurrent protection function

The negative-sequence overcurrent protection, phase discontinuityprotection and earth-fault protection are all used as backup protectionagainst line differential protection.

The backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2which can be used for external alarm purpose.

The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signalsfrom a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. It is possible tocreate individual autoreclosing sequences for each input.

The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connectedto the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command fromthe autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas the closecommand is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 97Application Manual

Page 104: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

DARREC1INIT_1INIT_2INIT_3INIT_4INIT_5INIT_6DEL_INIT_2DEL_INIT_3DEL_INIT_4BLK_RECL_TBLK_RCLM_TBLK_THERMCB_POSCB_READYINC_SHOTPINHIBIT_RECLRECL_ONSYNC

OPEN_CBCLOSE_CBCMD_WAIT

INPROLOCKED

PROT_CRDUNSUC_RECL

AR_ONREADYACTIVE

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

DARREC1_OPEN_CBDARREC1_CLOSE_CB

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFHPTOC1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

CBXCBR1_SELECTED

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

DARREC1_INPRO

GUID-963EDA28-A80A-4E12-A265-9804FB4429EA V1 EN

Figure 108: Autorecloser function

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by anumber of different protection functions available in the IED as well as externally bybinary input X110:BI1. The circuit breaker failure protection function offers differentoperating modes associated with the circuit breaker position and the measured phaseand residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breakerfeeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to thebinary output X100:PO2.

CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_ALTRBU

TRRET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFIPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

X110_BI1_EXT_CCBRBRF_START

GUID-3C4BA546-C7F2-4BEE-B081-73C7AD74CE4E V1 EN

Figure 109: Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available atbinary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with alockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. Ifthe lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4 can be assigned toRST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

98 RED615Application Manual

Page 105: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OTRPPTRC1_TRIP

PHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFIPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC2_OPERATE

X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT

EFHPTOC1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATELNPLDF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

GUID-97428C4E-DEE5-44DB-8C51-455FB2D9F1E1 V1 EN

Figure 110: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC2_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFIPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC2_OPERATE

X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT

EFHPTOC1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

T2PTTR1_OPERATECCBRBRF1_TRRET

GUID-ADD6D3E1-D539-4D7A-8096-715DD0B3D7D8 V1 EN

Figure 111: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.5.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 99Application Manual

Page 106: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64

TRIGGERED

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARMX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

PHLPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

PHHPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFIPTOC1_OPERATE

EFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

PCSITPC1_ALARM

PHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_STARTPHLPTOC1_START

T1PTTR1_START

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

DARREC1_INPRO

CCSPVC1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_ALARMT1PTTR1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_STARTPDNSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START

EFHPTOC1_STARTEFIPTOC1_STARTEFLPTOC1_STARTEFLPTOC2_START

LNPLDF_BLKD2H

LNPLDF1_START DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

GUID-C658211A-FDF1-4ECB-AD66-34E603CE8E4A V2 EN

Figure 112: Disturbance recorder

3.5.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure isdetected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measurecalculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessaryoperation.

CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL

ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-57D1F65C-2438-4C84-926D-8D21A1FAB8E7 V2 EN

Figure 113: Current circuit supervision function

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based onthe connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1introduces various supervision methods.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

100 RED615Application Manual

Page 107: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Set the parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1BLOCKPOSOPENPOSCLOSEOPEN_CB_EXECLOSE_CB_EXEPRES_ALM_INPRES_LO_INSPR_CHR_STSPR_CHRRST_IPOWRST_CB_WEARRST_TRV_TRST_SPR_T

TRV_T_OP_ALMTRV_T_CL_ALMSPR_CHR_ALM

OPR_ALMOPR_LO

IPOW_ALMIPOW_LO

CB_LIFE_ALMMON_ALM

PRES_ALMPRES_LO

OPENPOSINVALIDPOSCLOSEPOS

CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCB_OPEN_COMMAND

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGEDCB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LOSSCBR1_IPOW_ALMSSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALMSSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_LO

GUID-E16440E7-97F8-4BA5-A65A-8832F72F6333 V1 EN

Figure 114: Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM

SSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LO

SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM

SSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM

SSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALM

SSCBR1_PRES_LO

SSCBR1_ALARMS

GUID-CA85737C-AE1C-4BB1-B7AC-97A97EB90DAD V1 EN

Figure 115: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm

NOTIN OUTX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-9B1B6395-2EAC-4927-9D9E-77EE41162FF6 V1 EN

Figure 116: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included; TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions areblocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker opensignal.

It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 101Application Manual

Page 108: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM

TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM

ORB1B2

O

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_ALARM

GUID-521ECF9A-25C2-4582-8D40-1EA572E4C847 V1 EN

Figure 117: Trip circuit supervision function

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OTRPPTRC2_TRIP

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

TRPPTRC1_TRIP TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-36DBAACC-5D67-414F-89E1-DAB5F6411181 V1 EN

Figure 118: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration toblock the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of theline differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs duringprotection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally withoutconnections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarmis connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.

PCSITPC1OK

WARNINGALARMCOMM

PCSITPC1_ALARM

GUID-807946BF-54A3-4205-8409-DC71A4518C36 V2 EN

Figure 119: Protection communication supervision function

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binaryinformation which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking andalarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signaltransfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO input 6 and 7. These are interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected to theinput 8.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

102 RED615Application Manual

Page 109: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs. The remote binary transfer output signal is connected to thebinary output X110:SO3.

BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY

CCSPVC1_FAIL

X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_ABSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-7ACC6207-5896-4449-9E89-BAFA92A73010 V2 EN

Figure 120: Binary signal transfer function

3.5.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected instandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.

DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

GUID-F151A155-141D-4581-9218-30796B22E7F0 V1 EN

Figure 121: Disconnector 1 control logic

ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI8_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

GUID-8FF4B653-B8F2-4A83-AEB0-D0A371F8E7F1 V1 EN

Figure 122: Earthswitch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breakertruck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together withthe open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal tothe circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit breaker isalways enabled.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 103Application Manual

Page 110: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the breaker closing in the local IED.

Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.

CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP

SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL

OP_REQCL_REQ

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOSOPEN_ENAD

CLOSE_ENAD

TRUE

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP

CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSEFALSE

CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

CBXCBR1_SELECTED

GUID-B9EB21FF-B3F1-4604-875E-D679BF21A5D0 V2 EN

Figure 123: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

ORB1B2

O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CLDARREC1_CLOSE_CB

GUID-033E6103-FCE5-460E-AB2C-127523940A3E V1 EN

Figure 124: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CB_OPEN_COMMANDTRPPTRC1_TRIPCBXCBR1_EXE_OP

DARREC1_OPEN_CB

GUID-304247AE-6DEC-494B-AEDD-C884E5C42731 V1 EN

Figure 125: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

104 RED615Application Manual

Page 111: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ANDB1B2

O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSEREMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY

NOTIN OUT

AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

NOTIN OUT

NOTIN OUT

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

GUID-BB477666-A6B7-43C1-AE6B-D20528F6EDFC V1 EN

Figure 126: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuitbreaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature ofthe function.

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSET1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSET2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-8DFAE731-FCD9-4B2B-B0AF-04D1E35FCD1E V1 EN

Figure 127: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if it is applicable for the application.

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-1BAF2BFA-27D8-4E23-81F9-3D0B8F916E56 V1 EN

Figure 128: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 105Application Manual

Page 112: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-B2A3DFEB-8777-40F7-AA7B-39FD2EEF3F09 V1 EN

Figure 129: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.5.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residualcurrent.

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.

Load profile record LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.

CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN

LOW_ALARM

GUID-B3B20052-DF2B-4C6F-AFFC-DF6EBE403620 V1 EN

Figure 130: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-5541207C-33F0-4C30-BC61-FA4B4828ED6E V1 EN

Figure 131: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

RESCMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARN

GUID-8C5CCD15-3A6D-494F-B1CF-A96EC9C7D8C5 V1 EN

Figure 132: Current measurement: Residual current measurement

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

106 RED615Application Manual

Page 113: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD

GUID-557D77EF-39F9-4E45-B681-4214A621ABBF V2 EN

Figure 133: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN

MEM_ALARM

GUID-86C0CEA1-CD8A-4D98-83DE-D9F56D43A917 V2 EN

Figure 134: Other measurement: Load profile record

3.5.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED

X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110_BI1_EXT_CCBRBRF_START

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8GUID-7EFCB700-0C8D-48F8-8616-61A3E64F6C4B V1 EN

Figure 135: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 107Application Manual

Page 114: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4GUID-C10DB2F8-2663-4CDC-B032-F425F58578D9 V1 EN

Figure 136: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-SO1

X110 (BIO).X110-SO2

X110 (BIO).X110-SO3GUID-C643DA33-07A8-41F1-89E9-DD9CB7237283 V1 EN

Figure 137: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE

LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

CB_OPEN_COMMAND

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-0ACF5C83-087E-44ED-AA03-03376F3F090C V1 EN

Figure 138: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

108 RED615Application Manual

Page 115: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED1OKALARMRESET

LED2OKALARMRESET

LED3OKALARMRESET

LED4OKALARMRESET

LED5OKALARMRESET

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

PCSITPC1_ALARM

DARREC1_INPRO

GUID-47DBECE3-D6D9-47CB-ACA7-A7D3B54613EA V2 EN

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 109Application Manual

Page 116: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED6OKALARMRESET

LED7OKALARMRESET

LED8OKALARMRESET

LED9OKALARMRESET

LED10OKALARMRESET

LED11OKALARMRESET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

CCSPVC1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_ALARMT1PTTR1_ALARM

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A

BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

SSCBR1_ALARMS

TCSSCBR_ALARM

GUID-81B95D0E-F4E0-4BE7-A2F6-ABFC9D885FF5 V2 EN

Figure 139: Default LED connection

3.5.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics

The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication andbackup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimumpulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. Theoutput from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

TPGAPC1IN1IN2

OUT1OUT2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSELNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATELNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVEPCSITPC1_ALARM

GUID-FBFAE053-C586-47D2-9D37-918400B7516B V2 EN

Figure 140: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

110 RED615Application Manual

Page 117: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TPGAPC2IN1IN2

OUT1OUT2

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSEBACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

EFxPTOC_OPERATEPHxPTOC_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

GUID-E7E999CE-55E3-443A-95A2-4BF9339375AD V1 EN

Figure 141: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

3.5.3.8 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,harmonics-based earth-fault protection, high-impedance fault detection functionPHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and few instances ofdifferent types of timers and control functions. These functions are not included inapplication configuration but they can be added based on the system requirements.

3.6 Standard configuration D

3.6.1 Applications

The standard configuration with directional overcurrent and directional earth-faultprotection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection is mainly intended for cablefeeder applications in distribution networks. The standard configuration for linecurrent differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. Theconfiguration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection based onadmittance, wattmetric or harmonic principle.

Standard configuration D is not designed for using all the available functionalitycontent in one relay at the same time. Frequency protection functions and thirdinstances of voltage protection functions must be added with the ApplicationConfiguration tool. To ensure the performance of the relay, the user-specificconfiguration load is verified with the Application Configuration tool in PCM600.

The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 111Application Manual

Page 118: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.6.2 Functions

COMMUNICATION

Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1/-9-2LE Modbus®

IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP

CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION

ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data - Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,

SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI

ORAND

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI

STANDARDCONFIGURATION

RL

ClearESCI

O

Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization

RL

ClearESCI

O

U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr

IL2 0 A

A

With in-zone power transformer supportRED615 D

3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF

OPTSOPTM

2×TCSTCM

2×I2>46

I2/I1>46PD

3Ith>F49F

3I>>>50P/51P

2×Master Trip

Lockout relay94/86

MCS 3IMCS 3I

PCSPCS

BSTBST

CBCMCBCM

2×3I>→67-1

3I2f>68

3I>>→67-2

3dI>L87L

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1)

Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)

CB

DC

ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs

from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for

primary object3) Status indication function for primary object

1 -

2 3

1 2

REMARKS

Optionalfunction

No. ofinstances

Alternative function to be defined when ordering

OR

Io/Uo

Calculatedvalue

MEASUREMENT

- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- RTD/mA measurement (optional)- Symmetrical components

Analog interface types 1)

Current transformer

Voltage transformer1) Conventional transformer inputs2) One of the five inputs is reserved for

future applications

2)

4

5

O→I79

FUSEF60

PQM3IPQM3I

PQM3UPQM3V

PQMUPQMV

SYNC25

U12

U12

3Ith>T/G/C49T/G/C

f>/f<,df/dt81

3×Uo>59G

3I

Uo

Uo

Io

UL1

UL2

UL3

UL1UL2UL3

18×MAPMAP

FLOC21FL

2xRTD1xmA SOTF

SOTF

2×Io>→67N-1

Io>>→67N-2

Io>IEF→67NIEF

Io>>51N-2

3×Yo>→21YN

3×Po>→32N

OR

Io>HA51NHA

OR

PHIZHIZ

3I

Io

Io

3×3U<27

U2>47O-

U1<47U+

3×3U>59

UL1

UL2

UL3

RED615 AT REMOTE

END

3I

4×PQUUBPQVUB

GUID-F76822E6-DDB6-44F2-8704-5A5B3035BAFD V2 EN

Figure 142: Functionality overview for standard configuration D

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

112 RED615Application Manual

Page 119: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.6.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.

Table 26: Default connections for binary inputs

BIO card DescriptionX110-BI1 Lockout reset

X110-BI2 Binary transfer signal input

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker gas pressure alarm signal

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in service

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck in test

X110-BI7 Earthing switch in closed position

X110-BI8 Earthing switch in opened position

X120-BI1 External blocking signal for overcurrent instantaneous stage

X120-BI2 Circuit breaker in closed position

X120-BI3 Circuit breaker opened position

X120-BI4 -

Table 27: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Close circuit close command

X100-PO2 Circuit breaker failed signal - Backup trip to upstream breaker

X100-SO1 Line differential protection operated

X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available

X100-PO3 Circuit breaker open command

X100-PO4 Master trip 2 activated

X110- SO1 Blocking signal for upstream overcurrent protection

X110- SO2 Backup protection operated

X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal

X110- SO4 -

Table 28: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description1 Line differential protection biased stage operated

2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operated

3 Line differential protection not active

4 Protection communication supervision alarm

5 Autoreclose operation in progress

Table continues on next page

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 113Application Manual

Page 120: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED Description6 Backup protection operated

7 Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate

8 Disturbance recorder triggered

9 Supervision alarm

10 Binary transfer signal received

11 Binary transfer signal send

3.6.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 29: Default disturbance recorder analog channels

Channel Description1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 Uo

6 U1

7 U2

8 U3

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Table 30: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising

2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising

3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

4 DPHHPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising

5 DPHLPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising

6 DPHLPDOC2 - start Positive or Rising

7 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

8 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising

9 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising

10 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

11 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising

WPWDE1 - start

EFPADM1 - start

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

114 RED615Application Manual

Page 121: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Channel ID text Level trigger mode12 DEFLPDEF2 - start Positive or Rising

WPWDE2 - start

EFPADM2 - start

13 DEFHPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising

WPWDE3 - start

EFPADM3 - start

14 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

15 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising

16 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising

17 PHPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising

18 PHPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising

20 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising

21 ROVPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising

23 PSPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising

24 NSPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising

25 PHPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising

26 PHPTUV2 - start Positive or Rising

32 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off

33 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off

34 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off

35 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off

36 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

DPHHPDOC1 - operate

DPHLPDOC1 - operate

DPHLPDOC2 - operate

37 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate

38 INTRPTEF1 - operate Level trigger off

39 EFHPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

40 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off

WPWDE1 - operate

EFPADM1 - operate

DEFLPDEF2 - operate

WPWDE2 - operate

EFPADM2 - operate

DEFLPDEF3 - operate

WPWDE3 - operate

EFPADM3 - operate

41 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

Table continues on next page

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 115Application Manual

Page 122: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Channel ID text Level trigger mode42 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off

43 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off

44 PHPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off

PHPTOV2 - operate

45 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off

ROVPTOV2 - operate

PSPTUV1 - operate

NSPTOV1 - operate

46 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off

T2PTTR2 - operate

47 PHPTUV1 - operate Level trigger off

PHPTUV2 - operate

49 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off

50 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off

51 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off

52 SEQSPVC - fusef 3ph Level trigger off

53 SEQSPVC - fusef u Level trigger off

54 X110BI4 - CB spring charged Level trigger off

55 X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm Level trigger off

56 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off

57 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off

58 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off

59 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off

DARREC1 - close CB

60 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off

3.6.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.

The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from a current transformer. Theresidual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected CTs, anexternal core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

116 RED615Application Manual

Page 123: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The phase voltages to the protection relay are fed from a voltage transformer. Theresidual voltage to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected VTs, anopen delta connected VT or calculated internally.

The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.

3.6.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.

Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended tobe the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,it is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker andearth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention ofthis connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage bymultiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to afailure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 117Application Manual

Page 124: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

NOTIN OUT

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS

OPERATESTART

STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE

REMOTE_FEEDER_READY

LNPLDF1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAIL

REMOTE_CB_OPEN

REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF_RSTD2H

LNPLDF1_START

GUID-611D4EF5-AABC-487D-A52C-DF018335EC23 V2 EN

Figure 143: Line differential protection functions

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Threeof them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. Three-phase non-directionalovercurrent protection, instantaneous stage, PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizingthe binary input X120:BI1.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

118 RED615Application Manual

Page 125: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHIPTOC1_OPERATEX120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_START

DPHHPDOC1BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR

OPERATESTART

DPHLPDOC1BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR

OPERATESTART

DPHLPDOC2BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR

OPERATESTART

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

DPHHPDOC1_START

DPHLPDOC1_START

DPHLPDOC2_START

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

DPHHPDOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

DPHxPDOC_OPERATE

GUID-54378804-2337-4274-83AD-186C666871E0 V1 EN

Figure 144: Overcurrent protection functions

The upstream blocking from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high stageovercurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. Thisoutput can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protectionstage of the IED at the upstream bay.

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_START

GUID-A8F61C44-1CA7-4B82-8271-52E1469CDF37 V1 EN

Figure 145: Upstream blocking logic

Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the ordercode, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on conventionaldirectional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM, wattmetric-based earth-fault protectionWPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. In addition, there isa dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-faultprotection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 119Application Manual

Page 126: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

DEFHPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

DEFLPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

DEFLPDEF2BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

DEFxPDEF_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_START

DEFLPDEF2_START

DEFHPDEF1_START

GUID-CCDDEA70-4B90-414E-B10B-E65F9710D122 V1 EN

Figure 146: Directional earth-fault protection function

INTRPTEF1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTBLK_EF

INTRPTEF1_OPERATEINTRPTEF1_START

GUID-C531508C-CB98-42F7-AF49-0D056C0D0E92 V1 EN

Figure 147: Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection function

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

120 RED615Application Manual

Page 127: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

WPWDE1BLOCKRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

WPWDE2BLOCKRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

WPWDE3BLOCKRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

WPWDE1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATE

WPWDE3_OPERATE

WPWDE3_OPERATE

WPWDE1_START

WPWDE2_START

WPWDE3_START

WPWDE_OPERATE

GUID-5E88FC8D-A67B-4C50-8EEC-B06EDC7B1FA5 V1 EN

Figure 148: Wattmetric protection function

EFPADM1BLOCKRELEASE

OPERATESTART

EFPADM2BLOCKRELEASE

OPERATESTART

EFPADM3BLOCKRELEASE

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

EFPADM1_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATE

EFPADM3_OPERATE

EFPADM3_OPERATE

EFPADM1_START

EFPADM2_START

EFPADM3_START

EFPADM_OPERATE

GUID-AD669779-AC0D-4AC9-AB1A-A1448469F4EB V1 EN

Figure 149: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 121Application Manual

Page 128: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using calculated Io,EFHPTOC protects against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensatednetworks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originatingfrom the phase currents.

EFHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

EFHPTOC1_OPERATEEFHPTOC1_START

GUID-169A80DA-A6A3-4BF5-9065-F78EFB23121C V1 EN

Figure 150: Cross-country earth-fault protection

The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility toeither block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the availableovercurrent function blocks.

INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-6E272ED2-8A8D-47A0-9D96-095912F1894B V1 EN

Figure 151: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance.

NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

ORB1B2

O

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2_START

GUID-1114A789-B912-4053-B00A-5DF48069E33F V1 EN

Figure 152: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection function

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the normalthree-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.

PDNSPTOC1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTPDNSPTOC1_OPERATEPDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-109761C8-E52A-43F5-B3D2-95C402F79515 V1 EN

Figure 153: Phase discontinuity protection

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

122 RED615Application Manual

Page 129: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated, one with one timeconstant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detectingoverloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function isused to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.

T1PTTR1BLK_OPRENA_MULTTEMP_AMB

OPERATESTARTALARM

BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1BLOCKTEMP_AMB

OPERATESTARTALARM

BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_START

T2PTTR1_ALARM

T1PTTR1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_START

GUID-98DD8187-875F-4B44-977C-3B4097DE9D25 V1 EN

Figure 154: Thermal overcurrent protection function

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHPTOV and PHPTUV offerprotection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. However, only two instances ofPHPTOV and PHPTUV are used in the configuration. Positive-sequenceundervoltage PSPTUV and negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV protectionfunctions enable voltage-based unbalance protection. A failure in the voltagemeasuring circuit is detected by the fuse failure function and the activation isconnected to block undervoltage protection functions and voltage based unbalanceprotection functions to avoid faulty tripping.

PHPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE

START

PHPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE

START

ORB1B2

O

PHPTOV1_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_OPERATE

PHPTOV2_OPERATE

PHPTOV2_OPERATEPHPTOV_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_START

PHPTOV2_START

GUID-9C062068-BF92-419D-BF9B-23F1CADE7444 V2 EN

Figure 155: Overvoltage protection function

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 123Application Manual

Page 130: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

PHPTUV1BLOCK OPERATE

START

PHPTUV2BLOCK OPERATE

START

ORB1B2

O

PHPTUV1_OPERATE

PHPTUV1_OPERATE

PHPTUV2_OPERATE

PHPTUV2_OPERATE

SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U

SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U

PHPTUV_OPERATE

PHPTUV1_START

PHPTUV2_START

GUID-57AFB769-5CB0-41B2-9360-F705B44B2B2B V3 EN

Figure 156: Undervoltage protection function

The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection bydetecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as anonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.

ROVPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE

START

ROVPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE

START

ORB1B2

O

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE

ROVPTOV2_OPERATE

ROVPTOV2_OPERATEROVPTOV_OPERATE

ROVPTOV1_START

ROVPTOV2_START

GUID-FBEA2623-82A1-4F1E-8AD8-FA4E958D3F18 V2 EN

Figure 157: Residual voltage protection function

NSPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTNSPTOV1_OPERATESEQSPVC1_FUSEF_UNSPTOV1_START

GUID-E1E4377A-82F7-4C71-BDC8-C5D680E824D8 V2 EN

Figure 158: Negative sequence overvoltage protection function

PSPTUV1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTPSPTUV1_OPERATESEQSPVC1_FUSEF_UPSPTUV1_START

GUID-247948E4-57BB-4945-B6E9-85E149DED994 V2 EN

Figure 159: Positive sequence undervoltage protection function

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

124 RED615Application Manual

Page 131: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The overcurrent protection, negative-sequence overcurrentprotection, phase discontinuity, earth-fault protection, residualovervoltage protection, phase overvoltage and undervoltageprotection are all used as backup protection against line differentialprotection.

The backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2which can be used for external alarm purpose.

The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signalsfrom a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...6 inputs. It is possible tocreate individual autoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connectedto the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command fromthe autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas closecommand is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.

DARREC1INIT_1INIT_2INIT_3INIT_4INIT_5INIT_6DEL_INIT_2DEL_INIT_3DEL_INIT_4BLK_RECL_TBLK_RCLM_TBLK_THERMCB_POSCB_READYINC_SHOTPINHIBIT_RECLRECL_ONSYNC

OPEN_CBCLOSE_CBCMD_WAIT

INPROLOCKED

PROT_CRDUNSUC_RECL

AR_ONREADYACTIVE

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

DARREC1_OPEN_CBDARREC1_CLOSE_CB

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATENSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATE

EFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATE

WPWDE3_OPERATE

CBXCBR1_SELECTED

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

DARREC1_INPRO

GUID-94B242D2-EE8E-4E0B-B0D4-774317C8FC70 V1 EN

Figure 160: Autoreclosing function

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by anumber of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breakerfailure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuitbreaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 125Application Manual

Page 132: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to thebinary output X100:PO2.

CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_ALTRBU

TRRET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

GUID-527012AF-B080-4E51-BF8C-5888C2C4C4EA V1 EN

Figure 161: Circuit breaker failure protection function

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available atbinary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with alockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. Ifthe lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X110:BI1 can be assigned toRST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

126 RED615Application Manual

Page 133: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC1_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE

PSPTUV1_OPERATE

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

NSPTOV1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

GUID-2C4612B0-8C10-4CF1-BD5F-39E0DCD01F9D V2 EN

Figure 162: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 127Application Manual

Page 134: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC2_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE

PSPTUV1_OPERATE

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

NSPTOV1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

GUID-F3A60700-5E46-4F06-8D96-765FBCF5729E V2 EN

Figure 163: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.6.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

128 RED615Application Manual

Page 135: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64

TRIGGERED

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARMX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

ROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE

PSPTUV1_OPERATE

PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

NSPTOV1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U

CCSPVC1_FAIL

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

PCSITPC1_ALARM

PHIPTOC1_STARTDEFLPDEF1_START

DEFLPDEF2_START

DEFHPDEF1_START

EFPADM1_START

EFPADM2_START

EFPADM3_START

WPWDE1_START

WPWDE2_START

WPWDE3_START

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

DPHHPDOC1_STARTDPHLPDOC1_STARTDPHLPDOC2_START

INTRPTEF1_STARTEFHPTOC1_START

PDNSPTOC1_START

PHPTOV1_STARTPHPTOV2_START

NSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START

T1PTTR1_STARTT2PTTR1_START

LNPLDF1_START

ROVPTOV1_STARTROVPTOV2_START

PSPTUV1_STARTNSPTOV1_STARTPHPTUV1_STARTPHPTUV2_START

LNPLDF_RSTD2H

T1PTTR1_ALARMT2PTTR1_ALARM

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH

DARREC1_INPRO

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

GUID-66D3883A-0972-4CF4-B376-3C2B42AFA141 V3 EN

Figure 164: Disturbance recorder

3.6.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure isdetected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measures thecalculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessaryoperation.

CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL

ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-6D7C2FDE-A876-4ABA-B67D-C796339C0F96 V2 EN

Figure 165: Current circuit supervision function

Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC1 detects failures in the voltage measurementcircuits at bus side. Failures, such as an open MCB, raise an alarm.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 129Application Manual

Page 136: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

SEQSPVC1BLOCKCB_CLOSEDDISCON_OPENMINCB_OPEN

FUSEF_3PHFUSEF_UX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTSEQSPVC1_FUSEF_USEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH

GUID-4A101AD2-2735-4154-9872-04E4AF5611C6 V2 EN

Figure 166: Fuse failure supervision function

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switchstatus based on the connected binary input information and the measured currentlevels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.

Set parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1BLOCKPOSOPENPOSCLOSEOPEN_CB_EXECLOSE_CB_EXEPRES_ALM_INPRES_LO_INSPR_CHR_STSPR_CHRRST_IPOWRST_CB_WEARRST_TRV_TRST_SPR_T

TRV_T_OP_ALMTRV_T_CL_ALMSPR_CHR_ALM

OPR_ALMOPR_LO

IPOW_ALMIPOW_LO

CB_LIFE_ALMMON_ALM

PRES_ALMPRES_LO

OPENPOSINVALIDPOSCLOSEPOS

CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCB_OPEN_COMMAND

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGEDCB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LOSSCBR1_IPOW_ALMSSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALMSSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_LO

GUID-5357065F-5B56-4478-831F-5F761EF68D8E V1 EN

Figure 167: Circuit breaker condition monitoring function

ORB1B2

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM

SSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LO

SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM

SSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM

SSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALM

SSCBR1_PRES_LO

SSCBR1_ALARMS

GUID-851424FB-003E-4B56-83F2-9D6DEB4FA8D8 V1 EN

Figure 168: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm

NOTIN OUTX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-85AE4A88-0F81-4692-AB72-F76886830EDF V1 EN

Figure 169: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions areblocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker opensignal.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

130 RED615Application Manual

Page 137: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM

TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM

ORB1B2

O

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_ALARM

GUID-62930E10-32E5-4921-90A5-054F5549A863 V1 EN

Figure 170: Trip circuit supervision function

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OTRPPTRC2_TRIP

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

TRPPTRC1_TRIP TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-9DE42D33-5655-4E55-A2F2-0637375ED830 V1 EN

Figure 171: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC is used in the configuration to blockthe operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of the linedifferential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs during theprotection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally withoutconnections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarmis connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.

PCSITPC1OK

WARNINGALARMCOMM

PCSITPC1_ALARM

GUID-58C48BE3-531B-44BE-A181-0E5F2CFDC098 V2 EN

Figure 172: Protection communication supervision function

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 131Application Manual

Page 138: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO is used for changing any binaryinformation which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking andalarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signaltransfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO inputs 6 and 7. This is interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected toinput 8.

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs. The remote binary transfer output signal is connected to thebinary output X110:SO3.

BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

REMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY

CCSPVC1_FAILREMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_ABSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-87A8E8D2-1554-4778-BF8C-B810F92C8F9E V2 EN

Figure 173: Binary signal transfer function

3.6.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in thestandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.

DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

GUID-E64DC447-49CC-4B85-9F45-22476C09D978 V1 EN

Figure 174: Disconnector 1 control logic

ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI8_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

GUID-28CD15D7-2D66-449B-9268-129D9739D602 V1 EN

Figure 175: Earth-switch 1 control logic

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

132 RED615Application Manual

Page 139: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breakertruck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together withthe open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal tothe circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit breaker isalways enabled.

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.

CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP

SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL

OP_REQCL_REQ

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOSOPEN_ENAD

CLOSE_ENAD

TRUE

X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP

CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSEFALSE

CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

CBXCBR1_SELECTED

GUID-6C35F21A-59A7-4EA8-9A6B-6FF1195E2B9D V2 EN

Figure 176: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.

ORB1B2

O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CLDARREC1_CLOSE_CB

GUID-85700A51-C7A3-4CE2-82DD-BE499AED6BBA V1 EN

Figure 177: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CB_OPEN_COMMANDTRPPTRC1_TRIPCBXCBR1_EXE_OP

DARREC1_OPEN_CB

GUID-BDEE048C-67D8-4979-B135-5CBEAE8EC89E V1 EN

Figure 178: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 133Application Manual

Page 140: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ANDB1B2

O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSEREMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY

NOTIN OUT

AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

NOTIN OUT

NOTIN OUT

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

GUID-7A1BC865-FEEC-483B-902A-FA63B943377F V1 EN

Figure 179: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuitbreaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature ofthe function.

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSET1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSET2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-50A9F154-A417-4EF5-A3D8-41F165016CF6 V1 EN

Figure 180: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-F4165FE3-89D0-442D-AE06-DE100001A9F8 V1 EN

Figure 181: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

134 RED615Application Manual

Page 141: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-234BEA35-18B0-41CA-9B82-F7F4F098DBA7 V1 EN

Figure 182: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.6.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residualcurrent.

The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by three-phasevoltage measurement VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card inthe back panel. The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequencevoltage and the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residualvoltage.

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.

The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phasepower and energy measurement PEMMXU1 are available. Load profile recordLDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1 offers the ability toobserve the loading history of the corresponding feeder.

CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN

LOW_ALARM

GUID-D90049A9-79DB-4509-8FCF-698EA072ED0C V1 EN

Figure 183: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-B673B40B-4BC5-4B68-A9EA-D7B775EDDE1B V1 EN

Figure 184: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 135Application Manual

Page 142: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

RESCMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARN

GUID-5F19BB51-E128-4264-92CE-80919279D13C V1 EN

Figure 185: Current measurement: Residual current measurement

VMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN

LOW_ALARM

GUID-185F1398-111B-4110-A7EF-A3DA5C402034 V1 EN

Figure 186: Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage measurement

VSMSQI1

GUID-DC4A3CBE-B6FD-4010-BA67-57D51816E5A2 V1 EN

Figure 187: Voltage measurement: Sequence voltage measurement

RESVMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARN

GUID-67A789F2-B77F-42BD-8137-0AC44E5FF554 V1 EN

Figure 188: Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurement

FMMXU1

GUID-5273D289-0FE3-47D3-B57A-0BA22B5EC842 V1 EN

Figure 189: Other measurement: Frequency measurement

PEMMXU1RSTACM

GUID-D2FA74CF-B6E0-46F7-80D8-AEAE9B36A063 V1 EN

Figure 190: Other measurement: Three-phase power and energy measurement

FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD

GUID-2FC37793-AF71-4854-A84A-70CCEEA56E32 V2 EN

Figure 191: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN

MEM_ALARM

GUID-668FDBE4-A071-4F49-9142-2BCA9129622B V2 EN

Figure 192: Other measurement: Load profile record

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

136 RED615Application Manual

Page 143: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.6.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM

X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED

X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED

X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT

X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1

GUID-F761D951-A662-402A-B61A-D9E5FBCAA3F4 V1 EN

Figure 193: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block

X120_BI3_CB_OPENED

X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED

X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2

X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3GUID-8E0F1D9B-9E5C-405E-B22A-0E5535EDF43D V1 EN

Figure 194: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block

UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING

REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

X110 (BIO).X110-SO1

X110 (BIO).X110-SO2

X110 (BIO).X110-SO3GUID-299FE861-9452-4002-A3E6-18ADD61E3FE4 V1 EN

Figure 195: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 137Application Manual

Page 144: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

CB_OPEN_COMMAND

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE

LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-EE457369-A302-45CC-94F4-C44D0CD0A08C V1 EN

Figure 196: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

138 RED615Application Manual

Page 145: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED1OKALARMRESET

LED2OKALARMRESET

LED3OKALARMRESET

LED4OKALARMRESET

LED5OKALARMRESET

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

PCSITPC1_ALARM

DARREC1_INPRO

GUID-A1199E6D-B317-495E-B6D9-B083279F43D8 V2 EN

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 139Application Manual

Page 146: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED6OKALARMRESET

LED7OKALARMRESET

LED8OKALARMRESET

LED9OKALARMRESET

LED10OKALARMRESET

LED11OKALARMRESET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_ALARMT2PTTR1_ALARM

SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PHTCSSCBR_ALARM

CCSPVC1_ALARMSSCBR1_ALARMS

DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED

BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A

BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A

GUID-76D5018B-613B-4D92-B646-A53D972CDB0F V2 EN

Figure 197: Default LED connection

3.6.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics

The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication andbackup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to minimum pulsetimer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The outputfrom TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

TPGAPC1IN1IN2

OUT1OUT2

DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSELNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATELNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVEPCSITPC1_ALARM

GUID-3CDDEC1A-AAFA-46E2-8EC0-02005DEE2C07 V2 EN

Figure 198: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

140 RED615Application Manual

Page 147: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TPGAPC2IN1IN2

OUT1OUT2

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

PSPTUV1_OPERATENSPTOV1_OPERATE

DPHxPDOC_OPERATEDEFxPDEF_OPERATE

EFPADM_OPERATEWPWDE_OPERATE

FREQUENCY_OPEATE

PHPTOV_OPERATEPHPTUV_OPERATE

ROVPTOV_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE

GUID-39193B88-CF7E-4808-8C0C-3F9F3281AA8A V1 EN

Figure 199: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse

3.6.3.8 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,fault locator, harmonics-based earth-fault protection, high-impedance fault detectionfunction PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and differenttypes of timers and control functions. These functions are not included in applicationconfiguration but they can be added based on the system requirements.

3.7 Standard configuration E

3.7.1 Applications

The standard configuration with directional overcurrent and directional earth-faultprotection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection is mainly intended for cablefeeder applications in distribution networks. The standard configuration for linecurrent differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. Theconfiguration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection based onadmittance, wattmetric or harmonic principle.

Standard configuration E is not designed for using all the available functionalitycontent in one relay at the same time. Frequency protection functions and thirdinstances of voltage protection functions must be added with the Application

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 141Application Manual

Page 148: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Configuration tool. To ensure the performance of the relay, the user-specificconfiguration load is verified with the Application Configuration tool in PCM600.

The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

142 RED615Application Manual

Page 149: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.7.2 Functions

RED615 AT REMOTE

END

COMMUNICATION

Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850-9-2LE Modbus®

IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP

CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION

ALSO AVAILABLE

- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data- Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,

SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI

ORAND

LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY

PROTECTION LOCAL HMI

CONTROL AND INDICATION 1)

Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)

CB

DC

ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs

from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for

primary object3) Status indication function for primary object

1 -

2 3

1 2

STANDARDCONFIGURATION

REMARKS

Optionalfunction

No. ofinstances

Alternative function to be defined when ordering

OR

Io/Uo

Calculatedvalue

RL

ClearESCI

O

Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization

RL

ClearESCI

O

U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr

IL2 0 A

A

With in-zone power transformer supportRED615

MEASUREMENT

Analog interface types 1)

Current sensor

Voltage sensor

1) Combi sensor inputs with conventionalIo input

Current transformer 1

3

3

- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- Symmetrical components

E

3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF

OPTSOPTM

2×TCSTCM

2×I2>46

I2/I1>46PD

3Ith>F49F

3I>>>50P/51P

2×Master Trip

Lockout relay94/86

2×Io>→67N-1

Io>>→67N-2

Io>IEF→67NIEF

Io>>51N-2

MCS 3IMCS 3I

PCSPCS

BSTBST

CBCMCBCM

3×Yo>→21YN

3×Po>→32N

OR

Io>HA51NHA

OR

2×3I>→67-1

3I2f>68

3I>>→67-2

3dI>L87L

PQM3IPQM3I

PQM3UPQM3V

PQMUPQMV

O→I79

FUSEF60

18×MAPMAP

FLOC21FL

SOTFSOTF

SYNC25

UL1

UL2

UL3

3Ith>T/G/C49T/G/C

IEC 61850-9-2LE

UL1

UL1UL2UL3

U1<47U+

3I

Io

Io

3I

3I

3×3U<27

U2>47O-

3×3U>59

3×Uo>59G

Uo

f>/f<,df/dt81

PQUUBPQVUB

Io

GUID-D0C7BD80-3FC0-448D-ACD4-D6123319339C V2 EN

Figure 200: Functionality overview for standard configuration E

3.7.2.1 Default I/O connections

Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 143Application Manual

Page 150: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Table 31: Default connections for binary inputs

BIO card DescriptionX110-BI1 Circuit breaker plug not inserted

X110-BI2 Circuit breaker spring charged

X110-BI3 Circuit breaker in opened position

X110-BI4 Circuit breaker closed position

X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in test

X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck in service

X110-BI7 Earthing switch in opened position

X110-BI8 Earthing switch in closed position

Table 32: Default connections for binary outputs

Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Release for circuit breaker closing

X100-PO2 Circuit breaker closed command

X100-SO1 Release for circuit breaker truck

X100-SO2 Release for earthing switch

X100-PO3 Circuit breaker open command

X100-PO4 Circuit breaker failed signal - Retrip

X110- SO1 -

X110- SO2 -

X110- SO3 -

X110- SO4 -

Table 33: Default connections for LEDs

LED Description1 Circuit breaker close enabled

2 Overcurrent protection operated

3 Earth-fault protection operated

4 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operated

5 Line differential protection biased stage operated

6 Thermal protection

7 Line differential protection not active

8 Protection communication supervision alarm

9 Supervision alarm

10 Circuit breaker monitoring alarm

11 -

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

144 RED615Application Manual

Page 151: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.7.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings

Table 34: Default disturbance recorder analog channels

Channel Description1 IL1

2 IL2

3 IL3

4 Io

5 Uo

6 U1

7 U2

8 U3

9 -

10 -

11 -

12 -

Table 35: Default disturbance recorder binary channels

Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising

2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising

3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

4 DPHHPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising

5 DPHLPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising

6 DPHLPDOC2 - start Positive or Rising

7 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

8 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising

9 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising

10 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

11 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising

WPWDE1 - start

EFPADM1 - start

12 DEFLPDEF2 - start Positive or Rising

WPWDE2 - start

EFPADM2 - start

13 DEFHPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising

WPWDE3 - start

EFPADM3 - start

14 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising

15 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising

Table continues on next page

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 145Application Manual

Page 152: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Channel ID text Level trigger mode16 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising

17 PHPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising

18 PHPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising

20 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising

21 ROVPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising

23 PSPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising

24 NSPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising

25 PHPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising

26 PHPTUV2 - start Positive or Rising

32 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off

33 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off

34 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off

35 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off

36 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

DPHHPDOC1 - operate

DPHLPDOC1 - operate

DPHLPDOC2 - operate

37 NSPTOC1 - operater Level trigger off

NSPTOC2 - operate

38 INTRPTEF1 - operate Level trigger off

39 EFHPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

40 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off

WPWDE1 - operate

EFPADM1 - operate

DEFLPDEF2 - operate

WPWDE2 - operate

EFPADM2 - operate

DEFLPDEF3 - operate

WPWDE3 - operate

EFPADM3 - operate

41 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off

42 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off

43 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off

44 PHPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off

PHPTOV2 - operate

45 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off

ROVPTOV2 - operate

PSPTUV1 - operate

NSPTOV1 - operate

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

146 RED615Application Manual

Page 153: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Channel ID text Level trigger mode46 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off

T2PTTR2 - operate

47 PHPTUV1 - operate Level trigger off

PHPTUV2 - operate

49 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off

50 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off

51 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off

52 X110BI2 - CB spring discharged Level trigger off

53 X110BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off

54 X110BI4 - CB closed Level trigger off

55 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off

DARREC1 - close CB

56 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off

57 General start pulse Level trigger off

58 General operate pulse Level trigger off

3.7.3 Functional diagrams

The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.

The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.

The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from Rogowski or Combi sensors.The residual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connectedCTs, an external core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.

The phase voltages to the protection relay are fed from Combi sensors. The residualvoltage is calculated internally.

The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.

Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 147Application Manual

Page 154: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.7.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection

The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.

Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended tobe the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,it is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker andearth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention ofthis connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage bymultiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

NOTIN OUT

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS

OPERATESTART

STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_OPERATELNPLDF1_START

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE

CCSPVC1_FAIL

REMOTE_FEEDER_READYREMOTE_CB_OPEN

REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

LNPLDF_BLKD2H

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

GUID-87CBED03-0383-4BE8-854E-F7D5F538EA21 V2 EN

Figure 201: Line differential protection functions

Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Threeof them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. Three-phase non-directionalovercurrent protection, instantaneous stage, PHIPTOC1 is blocked when linedifferential is active.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

148 RED615Application Manual

Page 155: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

DPHHPDOC1BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR

OPERATESTART

DPHLPDOC1BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR

OPERATESTART

DPHLPDOC2BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR

OPERATESTART

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

DPHHPDOC1_START

DPHLPDOC1_START

DPHLPDOC2_START

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

DPHHPDOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

DPHxPDOC_OPERATE

PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

PHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHIPTOC1_START

LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVEINRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-866A9329-0726-48E5-B316-BE9FAC9C3BFE V1 EN

Figure 202: Overcurrent protection functions

Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to theIED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based onconventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together withadmittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM, wattmetric-based earth-faultprotection WPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. Inaddition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-basedearth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensatednetworks.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 149Application Manual

Page 156: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

DEFHPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

DEFLPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

DEFLPDEF2BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

DEFxPDEF_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF1_START

DEFLPDEF2_START

DEFHPDEF1_START

GUID-83E3A3E3-FA76-4A2F-A347-E49A5D2BA786 V1 EN

Figure 203: Directional earth-fault protection function

INTRPTEF1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTBLK_EF

INTRPTEF1_OPERATEINTRPTEF1_START

GUID-31918CB0-4497-4D34-8A94-D6E9B9B9E802 V1 EN

Figure 204: Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection function

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

150 RED615Application Manual

Page 157: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

WPWDE1BLOCKRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

WPWDE2BLOCKRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

WPWDE3BLOCKRCA_CTL

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

WPWDE1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATE

WPWDE3_OPERATE

WPWDE3_OPERATE

WPWDE1_START

WPWDE2_START

WPWDE3_START

WPWDE_OPERATE

GUID-03F7F19D-876F-4442-B033-BB7B193A944C V1 EN

Figure 205: Wattmetric earth-fault protection function

EFPADM1BLOCKRELEASE

OPERATESTART

EFPADM2BLOCKRELEASE

OPERATESTART

EFPADM3BLOCKRELEASE

OPERATESTART

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

EFPADM1_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATE

EFPADM3_OPERATE

EFPADM3_OPERATE

EFPADM1_START

EFPADM2_START

EFPADM3_START

EFPADM_OPERATE

GUID-FDCDC5B3-335E-41CB-97E5-F481B5E0F5AF V1 EN

Figure 206: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 151Application Manual

Page 158: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using calculated Io,EFHPTOC1 protects against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensatednetworks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originatingfrom the phase currents.

EFHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

EFHPTOC1_OPERATEEFHPTOC1_START

GUID-101DFCBD-67C7-4002-941B-E0F5C338ECD0 V1 EN

Figure 207: Earth-fault protection function

The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility toeither block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the availableovercurrent function blocks.

INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H

GUID-0EF609AC-09A6-4B16-93C7-FAD1B59CE0EB V1 EN

Figure 208: Inrush detector function

Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance. The function is blocked on detection of failure incurrent secondary circuit.

NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT

OPERATESTART

ORB1B2

O

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

CCSPVC1_FAIL

CCSPVC1_FAIL

NSPTOC_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_START

NSPTOC2_START

GUID-2C582C54-8D7E-413A-8A4B-52EA6F7962E1 V2 EN

Figure 209: Negative sequence overcurrent protection function

Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the normalthree-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

152 RED615Application Manual

Page 159: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

PDNSPTOC1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTPDNSPTOC1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAILPDNSPTOC1_START

GUID-B4D669EF-FBC3-4722-AD3C-E4ED6A5F5407 V2 EN

Figure 210: Phase discontinuity protection function

Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one timeconstant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detectingoverloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function isused to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.

T1PTTR1BLK_OPRENA_MULTTEMP_AMB

OPERATESTARTALARM

BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1BLOCKTEMP_AMB

OPERATESTARTALARM

BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

T1PTTR1_OPERATE

T2PTTR1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_START

T2PTTR1_ALARM

T1PTTR1_ALARM

T2PTTR1_START

GUID-DD8DF01A-3462-4564-8AD2-C8C8ADF991AD V1 EN

Figure 211: Thermal overcurrent protection function

Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHPTOV and PHPTUV offerprotection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. However, only two instances ofPHPTOV and PHPTUV are used in the configuration. Positive-sequenceundervoltage PSPTUV and negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV protectionfunctions enable voltage-based unbalance protection.

PHPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE

START

PHPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE

START

PHPTUV1BLOCK OPERATE

START

PHPTUV2BLOCK OPERATE

START

PHPTOV1_OPERATE

PHPTOV2_OPERATE

PHPTUV1_OPERATE

PHPTUV2_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_START

PHPTOV2_START

PHPTUV1_START

PHPTUV2_START

GUID-FD2018DA-06D2-43A2-B1B9-C304150ED9AD V2 EN

Figure 212: Overvoltage and undervoltage protection function

Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection bydetecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as anonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 153Application Manual

Page 160: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ROVPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE

START

ROVPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE

START

ROVPTOV1_OPERATE

ROVPTOV2_OPERATE

ROVPTOV1_START

ROVPTOV2_START

GUID-50003B1E-3AF3-4A9C-8DC4-B24FB1437AE3 V2 EN

Figure 213: Residual overvoltage protection function

NSPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTNSPTOV1_OPERATENSPTOV1_START

GUID-77086659-9F8C-4D9B-A321-D477719D4E38 V1 EN

Figure 214: Negative sequence overvoltage protection function

PSPTUV1BLOCK OPERATE

STARTPSPTUV1_OPERATEPSPTUV1_START

GUID-D945E695-E908-43EC-85DA-0B0DAD3EEB0D V1 EN

Figure 215: Positive sequence undervoltage protection function

The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signalsfrom a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...6 inputs. It is possible tocreate individual autoreclose sequences for each input.

The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.

The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connectedto the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command fromthe autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas closecommand is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

154 RED615Application Manual

Page 161: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

DARREC1INIT_1INIT_2INIT_3INIT_4INIT_5INIT_6DEL_INIT_2DEL_INIT_3DEL_INIT_4BLK_RECL_TBLK_RCLM_TBLK_THERMCB_POSCB_READYINC_SHOTPINHIBIT_RECLRECL_ONSYNC

OPEN_CBCLOSE_CBCMD_WAIT

INPROLOCKED

PROT_CRDUNSUC_RECL

AR_ONREADYACTIVE

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD

DARREC1_OPEN_CBDARREC1_CLOSE_CB

X110_BI3_CB_OPENED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATENSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATE

EFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE

DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATE

WPWDE3_OPERATE

CBXCBR1_SELECTED

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

DARREC1_INPRO

GUID-CFECED4C-F593-4C8C-AF46-3677D75DF1C4 V1 EN

Figure 216: Autoreclosing function

Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by anumber of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breakerfailure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuitbreaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.

The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The same TRRET output is also connected to the binary outputX100:PO4.

CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT

CB_FAULT_ALTRBU

TRRET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OCCBRBRF1_TRRET

X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

EFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

WPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

CCBRBRF1_TRBU

GUID-5A56DA6F-3B22-4867-B935-AC209B7A8122 V1 EN

Figure 217: Circuit breaker failure protection function

General start and operate from all the functions are connected to minimum pulse timerTPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output fromTPGAPC1 can be connected to binary outputs.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 155Application Manual

Page 162: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TPGAPC4IN1IN2

OUT1OUT2

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_OPERATE

PHPTOV2_OPERATEPHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

PSPTUV1_OPERATE

NSPTOV1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

PHIPTOC1_START

DPHLPDOC2_STARTDPHLPDOC1_START

DPHHPDOC1_STARTNSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START

DEFHPDEF1_STARTDEFLPDEF1_STARTDEFLPDEF2_START

EFPADM1_STARTEFPADM2_STARTEFPADM3_START

INTRPTEF1_STARTEFHPTOC1_START

PDNSPTOC1_STARTROVPTOV1_STARTROVPTOV2_START

NSPTOV1_STARTWPWDE1_STARTWPWDE2_STARTWPWDE3_STARTPSPTUV1_STARTPHPTOV1_START

PHPTOV2_STARTPHPTUV1_STARTPHPTUV2_STARTT1PTTR1_STARTT2PTTR1_STARTLNPLDF1_START

GENERAL_START_PULSEGENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE

GUID-C7D2F9C8-CBC9-4588-BBEF-80C90BDF6473 V2 EN

Figure 218: General start and operate signals

The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output from TRPPTRC1 trip logic functions isavailable at binary output X100:PO3. The trip logic functions are provided with alockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. Ifthe lockout operation mode is required, binary input can be assigned to RST_LKOUTinput of the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

156 RED615Application Manual

Page 163: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC1_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE

PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

PSPTUV1_OPERATENSPTOV1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

GUID-32B07A1D-B7F6-479D-BF3B-3BB5331A863F V2 EN

Figure 219: Trip logic TRPPTRC1

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 157Application Manual

Page 164: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT

TRIPCL_LKOUT

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

TRPPTRC2_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATEPHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

PSPTUV1_OPERATE

NSPTOV1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

GUID-748AFA48-FAB3-46D7-A9E6-6631028E297F V2 EN

Figure 220: Trip logic TRPPTRC2

3.7.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder

The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.

Once the order of signals connected to binary inputs of RDRE ischanged, make the changes to parameter setting tool.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

158 RED615Application Manual

Page 165: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64

TRIGGERED

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

DARREC1_CLOSE_CB

X110_BI3_CB_OPENEDX110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE

DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC1_OPERATE

DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE

NSPTOC2_OPERATE

EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

ROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE

DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE

PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE

PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE

LNPLDF1_OPERATE

PSPTUV1_OPERATENSPTOV1_OPERATE

T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE

PHIPTOC1_START

DPHLPDOC2_STARTDPHLPDOC1_STARTDPHHPDOC1_START

NSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START

DEFHPDEF1_START

DEFLPDEF1_START

DEFLPDEF2_START

EFPADM1_START

EFPADM2_START

EFPADM3_START

INTRPTEF1_STARTEFHPTOC1_START

PDNSPTOC1_START

ROVPTOV1_STARTROVPTOV2_START

NSPTOV1_START

WPWDE1_START

WPWDE2_START

WPWDE3_STARTPSPTUV1_START

PHPTOV1_STARTPHPTOV2_START

PHPTUV1_STARTPHPTUV2_START

T1PTTR1_STARTT2PTTR1_START

LNPLDF1_START

INRPHAR1_BLK2H

CCSPVC1_FAILX110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL

CCBRBRF1_TRBULNPLDF_BLKD2H

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

T1PTTR1_ALARMT2PTTR1_ALARM

PCSITPC1_ALARM

DARREC1_INPROGENERAL_START_PULSE

GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE

GUID-2B380C77-3B2C-4788-8BEC-D1A60316C6F8 V3 EN

Figure 221: Disturbance recorder

3.7.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring

CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure isdetected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measures thecalculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessaryoperation.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 159Application Manual

Page 166: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL

ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM

GUID-7544D1F4-3408-4871-BDBD-CD69DE9A2F35 V2 EN

Figure 222: Current circuit supervision function

Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based onthe connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1introduces various supervision methods.

Set the parameters for SSCBR1 properly.

SSCBR1BLOCKPOSOPENPOSCLOSEOPEN_CB_EXECLOSE_CB_EXEPRES_ALM_INPRES_LO_INSPR_CHR_STSPR_CHRRST_IPOWRST_CB_WEARRST_TRV_TRST_SPR_T

TRV_T_OP_ALMTRV_T_CL_ALMSPR_CHR_ALM

OPR_ALMOPR_LO

IPOW_ALMIPOW_LO

CB_LIFE_ALMMON_ALM

PRES_ALMPRES_LO

OPENPOSINVALIDPOSCLOSEPOS

CB_OPEN_COMMANDCB_CLOSE_COMMAND

X110_BI3_CB_OPENEDX110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

CB_SPRING_CHARGEDX110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LOSSCBR1_IPOW_ALMSSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALMSSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_LO

GUID-99741CF0-7D88-4AAA-84EF-61E7DC4CBC2A V1 EN

Figure 223: Circuit breaker condition monitoring function

ORB1B2

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM

SSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LO

SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM

SSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM

SSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALM

SSCBR1_PRES_LO

SSCBR1_ALARMS

GUID-B6B90A88-8924-4B32-8F2A-DEF3931388FA V1 EN

Figure 224: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm

NOTIN OUT CB_SPRING_CHARGEDX110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

GUID-FA20C086-8CA5-4430-B18F-1FB631480979 V1 EN

Figure 225: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging

Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions areblocked by both the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the binary inputX110:BI1 indicating the IED plug out.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

160 RED615Application Manual

Page 167: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

It is assumed that there is external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.

Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.

TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM

TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM

ORB1B2

O

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR1_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR2_ALARM

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

TCSSCBR_ALARM

GUID-D5151801-2495-4DF2-A362-F7CB9AE1AFC0 V1 EN

Figure 226: Trip circuit supervision function

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

OTRPPTRC1_TRIPTRPPTRC2_TRIP

X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT

TCSSCBR_BLOCKING

GUID-7EA01D36-6EB3-41C3-AC1B-CB3536E444C0 V1 EN

Figure 227: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision

Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration toblock the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of theline differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs duringthe protection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internallywithout connections in the configurations. The protection communication supervisionalarm is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary outputX100:SO2.

PCSITPC1OK

WARNINGALARMCOMM

PCSITPC1_ALARM

GUID-D1562A57-E53D-43C7-BC28-A7E27E95C11A V2 EN

Figure 228: Protection communication supervision function

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 161Application Manual

Page 168: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO is used for changing any binaryinformation which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking andalarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.

In this configuration, local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO inputs 6 and 7. This is interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected toinput 8.

As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs.

BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8

RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A

CBXCBR1_OPENPOSCCSPVC1_FAIL

REMOTE_FEEDER_READYREMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

GUID-E5BF4D5D-5C15-408A-B9CC-19F8B9499729 V2 EN

Figure 229: Binary signal transfer

3.7.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking

Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in thestandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1 respectively.

The configuration also includes closed enable interlocking logic for disconnector andearthing switch. These signals are available for binary outputs X100:SO1 andX100:SO2 respectively.

DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O DC1_CLOSE_ENABLEDESSXSWI1_OPENPOSCBXCBR1_OPENPOS

GUID-FCAC88AB-7DA0-4F21-808E-C961DA3BA381 V1 EN

Figure 230: Disconnector 1 interlocking logic

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

162 RED615Application Manual

Page 169: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOS

ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI7_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O ES1_CLOSE_ENABLEDX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT

GUID-9A7AC8F3-6187-4203-8D9D-BC9B9D34FA72 V1 EN

Figure 231: Earth-switch 1 control logic

The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.

The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breakertruck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together withthe open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal tothe circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit breaker isalways enabled.

If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.

Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.

CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP

SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL

OP_REQCL_REQ

OPENPOSCLOSEPOS

OKPOSOPEN_ENAD

CLOSE_ENAD

TRUE

CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP

CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE

X110_BI3_CB_OPENEDX110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

FALSE

CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CBXCBR1_OPENPOS

CBXCBR1_SELECTED

GUID-26FE1003-2AA2-42AD-8E92-6E84693FBF66 V2 EN

Figure 232: Circuit breaker 1 control logic

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 163Application Manual

Page 170: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ORB1B2

O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CLDARREC1_CLOSE_CB

GUID-1893502C-2D0A-44DF-A2BE-37057971BE78 V1 EN

Figure 233: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CB_OPEN_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_OPTRPPTRC1_TRIP

DARREC1_OPEN_CB

GUID-AD01A758-DC66-4017-9F8A-A4321FF0BB4F V1 EN

Figure 234: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1

NOTIN OUT

AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

NOTIN OUT

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

CB_SPRING_CHARGED

LOCAL_FEEDER_READY

NOTIN OUT

AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

NOTIN OUT

ANDB1B2

O

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE

TRPPTRC1_TRIP

TRPPTRC2_TRIP

DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS

CB_SPRING_CHARGED

TCSSCBR_ALARMGUID-8A8014C7-EF80-45C5-BDCB-81392240A562 V1 EN

Figure 235: Circuit breaker close enable logic

Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuitbreaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature ofthe function.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

164 RED615Application Manual

Page 171: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSET1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSET2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE

GUID-DAFA0354-CBB5-4A1A-AE95-6C61DF47D264 V1 EN

Figure 236: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic

The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.

Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.

Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if it is applicable for the application.

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-4C5A7939-3DB5-4E2C-8057-BC2831AC51A9 V1 EN

Figure 237: External closing command for circuit breaker 1

ANDB1B2

O

ANDB1B2

O

ORB1B2

O

FALSE

FALSE

CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN

CONTROL_LOCAL

CONTROL_REMOTE

GUID-F8E822D5-467C-4F65-BC4C-8E224B373771 V1 EN

Figure 238: External opening command for circuit breaker 1

3.7.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions

The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residualcurrent.

The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase voltage measurement function VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected tothe X130 card in the back panel. Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measuresthe sequence voltage.

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 165Application Manual

Page 172: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.

Frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase powerand energy measurement PEMMXU1 are available. Load profile record LDPRLRC1is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1 offers the ability to observe theloading history of the corresponding feeder.

CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN

LOW_ALARM

GUID-21605B4E-39E0-4B01-AAA8-F9837624B897 V1 EN

Figure 239: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement

CSMSQI1

GUID-B12A010D-5651-40C2-84E6-DE98FB2446FC V1 EN

Figure 240: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement

RESCMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARN

GUID-D40B9D8C-2274-4C05-A80A-720413B2D9AA V1 EN

Figure 241: Current measurement: Residual current measurement

VMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM

HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN

LOW_ALARM

GUID-32CBD962-FA4F-4773-8AE8-4CA75080EF3A V1 EN

Figure 242: Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage measurement

VSMSQI1

GUID-C4C01605-D449-4A1C-8B7F-5445D42529B4 V1 EN

Figure 243: Voltage measurement: Sequence voltage measurement

FMMXU1

GUID-491E5D77-77E0-4BCD-A9AB-CAB90BB34C3D V1 EN

Figure 244: Other measurement: Frequency measurement

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

166 RED615Application Manual

Page 173: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

PEMMXU1RSTACM

GUID-DFAF0FB2-4B5B-41D4-B32F-C6524E78E15A V1 EN

Figure 245: Other measurement: Three-phase power and energy measurement

FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD

GUID-E66A78DE-D1C4-452F-9AB7-2792070EFB23 V2 EN

Figure 246: Other measurement: Data monitoring

LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN

MEM_ALARM

GUID-119EC22D-0241-4FAF-B5D9-9AEC58F98ECC V2 EN

Figure 247: Other measurement: Load profile record

The power quality functions CMHAI1 and VMHAI1 can be used to measure theharmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation, thatis, sage and swells can be measured by the voltage variation function PHQVVR1. Bydefault, these power quality functions are not included in the configuration.Depending on the application, the required logic connections can be made byPCM600.

3.7.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs

X110_BI3_CB_OPENED

X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED

X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE

X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST

X110_BI7_ES1_OPENED

X110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED

X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT

X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8

X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1

GUID-B790F48B-CE29-4B6F-9F1E-8999A1305540 V1 EN

Figure 248: Default binary inputs - X110

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 167Application Manual

Page 174: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

CB_OPEN_COMMAND

CB_CLOSE_COMMAND

CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD

DC1_CLOSE_ENABLED

ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED

CCBRBRF1_TRRET

X100 (PSM).X100-PO1

X100 (PSM).X100-PO2

X100 (PSM).X100-SO1

X100 (PSM).X100-SO2

X100 (PSM).X100-PO3

X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-6D07D6AC-B66C-4352-8580-1333FA32EAFD V1 EN

Figure 249: Default binary outputs - X100

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

168 RED615Application Manual

Page 175: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

LED1OKALARMRESET

LED2OKALARMRESET

LED3OKALARMRESET

LED4OKALARMRESET

LED5OKALARMRESET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE

PHIPTOC1_OPERATE

INTRPTEF1_OPERATE

PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE

EFHPTOC1_OPERATE

LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE

LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE

NSPTOC_OPERATE

DPHxPDOC_OPERATE

DEFxPDEF_OPERATE

EFPADM_OPERATEWPWDE_OPERATE

GUID-AAE166F5-E7EA-4F5C-AD82-A86D094C9007 V2 EN

LED6OKALARMRESET

LED7OKALARMRESET

LED8OKALARMRESET

LED9OKALARMRESET

LED10OKALARMRESET

OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6

O

ORB1B2

O

TCSSCBR_ALARM

LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE

PCSITPC1_ALARM

T1PTTR1_ALARMT2PTTR1_ALARM

CCSPVC1_ALARM

SSCBR1_ALARMS

GUID-401B69BF-1917-4EE7-A132-A1322C92B1B0 V2 EN

Figure 250: Default LED connection

1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations

RED615 169Application Manual

Page 176: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

3.7.3.7 Other functions

The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,fault locator, harmonics-based earth-fault protection, runtime counter for machinesand devices MDSOPT and few instances of different types of timers and controlfunctions. These functions are not included in application configuration but they canbe added based on the system requirements.

Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations

170 RED615Application Manual

Page 177: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Section 4 Requirements for measurementtransformers

4.1 Current transformers

4.1.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection

For reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to bechosen carefully. The distortion of the secondary current of a saturated CT mayendanger the operation, selectivity, and co-ordination of protection. However, whenthe CT is correctly selected, a fast and reliable short circuit protection can be enabled.

The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on thenetwork fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CTburden. The protection settings of the protection relay should be defined in accordancewith the CT performance as well as other factors.

4.1.1.1 Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor

The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primarycurrent to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer oftype 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For protectivecurrent transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest permissiblepercentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current prescribed forthe accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning protection).

Table 36: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers

Accuracy class Current error atrated primarycurrent (%)

Phase displacement at rated primarycurrent

Composite error atrated accuracy limitprimary current (%)minutes centiradians

5P ±1 ±60 ±1.8 5

10P ±3 - - 10

The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrentprotection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if thereare accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering, powermetering, and so on) of the protection relay.

The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current magnitudeat which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the secondary current

1MRS756498 N Section 4Requirements for measurement transformers

RED615 171Application Manual

Page 178: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the performance of theprotection relay.

In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy limitfactor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the actual CTburden.

The actual accuracy limit factor is calculated using the formula:

F FS S

S Sa n

in n

in

≈ ×

+

+

A071141 V1 EN

Fn the accuracy limit factor with the nominal external burden Sn

Sin the internal secondary burden of the CT

S the actual external burden

4.1.1.2 Non-directional overcurrent protection

The current transformer selectionNon-directional overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on the accuracyclass or on the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) of the CTs. It is, however,recommended to select a CT with Fa of at least 20.

The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal anddynamic strength of the current measuring input of the protection relay is notexceeded. This is always fulfilled when

I1n > Ikmax / 100,

Ikmax is the highest fault current.

The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of theprotection relay. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominalprimary current can be used than given by the formula.

Recommended start current settingsIf Ikmin is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is tooperate, the start current should be set using the formula:

Current start value < 0.7 × (Ikmin / I1n)

I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.

The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection relay inaccuracy, current transformererrors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.

Section 4 1MRS756498 NRequirements for measurement transformers

172 RED615Application Manual

Page 179: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the highset stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused by the CTsaturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is noticeably lowerthan Fa.

When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT doesnot need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simply according to theformula.

Delay in operation caused by saturation of current transformersThe saturation of CT may cause a delayed protection relay operation. To ensure thetime selectivity, the delay must be taken into account when setting the operate timesof successive protection relays.

With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that isas long as the time constant of the DC component of the fault current, when the currentis only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on the accuracy limitfactor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and on the operate timesetting.

With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as beingas long as the time constant of the DC component.

With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, the ACcomponent of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times thestarting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged.Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:

Fa > 20 × Current start value / I1n

The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the protection relay.

4.1.1.3 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection

The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection isimplemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.

1MRS756498 N Section 4Requirements for measurement transformers

RED615 173Application Manual

Page 180: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

A071142 V1 EN

Figure 251: Example of three-stage overcurrent protection

The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase shortcircuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is calculated tobe 59.

The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice thenominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective with thenext protection relay (not visible in Figure 251). The settings for the high-set stage andinstantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the downstreamprotection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined so that theprotection relay operates with the minimum fault current and it does not operate withthe maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in Figure 251.

For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (I>>>) inthis example is 3 500 A (5.83 × I2n). I2n is the 1.2 multiple with nominal primarycurrent of the CT. For the CT characteristics point of view, the criteria given by thecurrent transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the protection relay settingis considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burden could have beenselected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.

Section 4 1MRS756498 NRequirements for measurement transformers

174 RED615Application Manual

Page 181: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Section 5 Protection relay's physical connections

5.1 Inputs

5.1.1 Energizing inputs

5.1.1.1 Phase currents

The protection relay can also be used in single or two-phaseapplications by leaving one or two energizing inputs unoccupied.However, at least terminals X120:7-8 must be connected.

Table 37: Phase current inputs included in configurations A, B, C and D

Terminal DescriptionX120:7-8 IL1

X120:9-10 IL2

X120:11-12 IL3

5.1.1.2 Residual current

Table 38: Residual current input included in configurations A, B, C and D

Terminal DescriptionX120:13-14 Io

Table 39: Residual current input included in configuration E

Terminal DescriptionX130:1-2 Io

5.1.1.3 Phase voltages

Table 40: Phase voltage inputs included in configuration D

Terminal DescriptionX130:11-12 U1

X130:13-14 U2

X130:15-16 U3

1MRS756498 N Section 5Protection relay's physical connections

RED615 175Application Manual

Page 182: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

5.1.1.4 Residual voltage

Table 41: Additional residual voltage input included in configuration B

Terminal DescriptionX120:5-6 Uo

Table 42: Additional residual voltage input included in configuration D

Terminal DescriptionX130:17-18 Uo

5.1.1.5 Sensor inputs

Table 43: Combi sensor inputs included in configuration E

Terminal DescriptionX131 IL1

U1

X132 IL2U2

X133 IL3U3

5.1.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input

The auxiliary voltage of the protection relay is connected to terminals X100:1-2. AtDC supply, the positive lead is connected to terminal X100:1. The permitted auxiliaryvoltage range (AC/DC or DC) is marked on the top of the LHMI of the protectionrelay.

Table 44: Auxiliary voltage supply

Terminal DescriptionX100:1 + Input

X100:2 - Input

5.1.3 Binary inputs

The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatchoutput contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control of protectionrelay's settings.

Section 5 1MRS756498 NProtection relay's physical connections

176 RED615Application Manual

Page 183: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Table 45: Binary input terminals X110:1-13 with BIO0005 module

Terminal DescriptionX110:1 BI1, +

X110:2 BI1, -

X110:3 BI2, +

X110:4 BI2, -

X110:5 BI3, +

X110:6 BI3, -

X110:6 BI4, -

X110:7 BI4, +

X110:8 BI5, +

X110:9 BI5, -

X110:9 BI6, -

X110:10 BI6, +

X110:11 BI7, +

X110:12 BI7, -

X110:12 BI8, -

X110:13 BI8, +

Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configurations A, C and D.

Table 46: Binary input terminals X120-1...6

Terminal DescriptionX120:1 BI1, +

X120:2 BI1, -

X120:3 BI2, +

X120:2 BI2, -

X120:4 BI3, +

X120:2 BI3, -

X120:5 BI4, +

X120:6 BI4, -

Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configuration B.

Table 47: Binary input terminals X120:1-4

Terminal DescriptionX120:1 BI1, +

X120:2 BI1, -

X120:3 BI2, +

X120:2 BI2, -

X120:4 BI3, +

X120:2 BI3, -

1MRS756498 N Section 5Protection relay's physical connections

RED615 177Application Manual

Page 184: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Binary inputs of slot X130 are optional for configurations A, B and C.

Table 48: Binary input terminals X130:1-9

Terminal DescriptionX130:1 BI1, +

X130:2 BI1, -

X130:2 BI2, -

X130:3 BI2, +

X130:4 BI3, +

X130:5 BI3, -

X130:5 BI4, -

X130:6 BI4, +

X130:7 BI5, +

X130:8 BI5, -

X130:8 BI6, -

X130:9 BI6, +

Optional binary inputs of slot X130 are available with configuration D.

Table 49: Optional binary input terminals X130:1-8 with AIM0006

Terminal DescriptionX130:1 BI1, +

X130:2 BI1, -

X130:3 BI2, +

X130:4 BI2, -

X130:5 BI3, +

X130:6 BI3, -

X130:7 BI4, +

X130:8 BI4, -

5.1.4 RTD/mA inputs

It is possible to connect mA and RTD based measurement sensors to the protectionrelay, if the protection relay is provided with optional with AIM0003 module instandard configuration D.

Table 50: Optional RTD/mA inputs with AIM0003 module

Terminal DescriptionX130:1 mA 1 (AI1), +

X130:2 mA 1 (AI1), -

X130:3 RTD1 (AI2), +

X130:4 RTD1 (AI2), -

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRS756498 NProtection relay's physical connections

178 RED615Application Manual

Page 185: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Terminal DescriptionX130:5 RTD1 (AI2), ground

X130:6 RTD2 (AI3), +

X130:7 RTD2 (AI3), -

X130:8 RTD2 (AI3), ground

5.2 Outputs

5.2.1 Outputs for tripping and controlling

Output contacts PO1, PO2, PO3 and PO4 are heavy-duty trip contacts capable ofcontrolling most circuit breakers. In the factory default configuration, the trip signalsfrom all the protection stages are routed to PO3 and PO4.

Table 51: Output contacts

Terminal DescriptionX100:6 PO1, NO

X100:7 PO1, NO

X100:8 PO2, NO

X100:9 PO2, NO

X100:15 PO3, NO (TCS resistor)

X100:16 PO3, NO

X100:17 PO3, NO

X100:18 PO3 (TCS1 input), NO

X100:19 PO3 (TCS1 input), NO

X100:20 PO4, NO (TCS resistor)

X100:21 PO4, NO

X100:22 PO4, NO

X100:23 PO4 (TCS2 input), NO

X100:24 PO4 (TCS2 input), NO

5.2.2 Outputs for signalling

SO output contacts can be used for signalling on start and tripping of the protectionrelay. On delivery from the factory, the start and alarm signals from all the protectionstages are routed to signalling outputs.

1MRS756498 N Section 5Protection relay's physical connections

RED615 179Application Manual

Page 186: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Table 52: Output contacts X100:10-14

Terminal DescriptionX100:10 SO1, common

X100:11 SO1, NC

X100:12 SO1, NO

X100:13 SO2, NO

X100:14 SO2, NO

Table 53: Output contacts X110:14-24 with BIO0005

Terminal DescriptionX110:14 SO1, common

X110:15 SO1, NO

X110:16 SO1, NC

X110:17 SO2, common

X110:18 SO2, NO

X110:19 SO2, NC

X110:20 SO3, common

X110:21 SO3, NO

X110:22 SO3, NC

X110:23 SO4, common

X110:24 SO4, NO

Output contacts of slot X130 are available in the optional BIO0006 module withconfigurations A, B and C.

Table 54: Output contacts X130:10-18

Terminal DescriptionX130:10 SO1, common

X130:11 SO1, NO

X130:12 SO1, NC

X130:13 SO2, common

X130:14 SO2, NO

X130:15 SO2, NC

X130:16 SO3, common

X130:17 SO3, NO

X130:18 SO3, NC

Section 5 1MRS756498 NProtection relay's physical connections

180 RED615Application Manual

Page 187: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

5.2.3 IRF

The IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system of theprotection relay. Under normal operating conditions, the protection relay is energizedand the contact is closed (X100:3-5). When a fault is detected by the self-supervisionsystem or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the contact X100:3-5 drops off and thecontact X100:3-4 closes.

Table 55: IRF contact

Terminal DescriptionX100:3 IRF, common

X100:4 Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected

X100:5 Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected

5.3 Protection communication options

Two different protection communication options are available for the protectionrelay, that is, a fiber optic link and a galvanic pilot wire link.

Multi-mode or single-mode glass fiber can be used in a fiber optic link. Select therequired glass fiber mode when ordering the protection relay. Link lengths up to 2 kmwith multi-mode fiber and link lengths up to 20 km with single-mode fiber can beachieved. The fiber optic cable used for protection communication is connected to theX16/LD connector in the protection relay. See the technical manual for moreinformation.

If a galvanic pilot wire is used as a protection communication link, the pilot wiremodem RPW600 is required. Select the pilot wire option when ordering the protectionrelay. The protection communication link always requires two modems in a protectionscheme, thus delivered in pairs of master (RPW600M) and follower (RPW600F)units. The protection relay is connected to the pilot wire modem using a single-modefiber optic cable. Thus a single-mode version of protection relay is required if the pilotwire link is used. The fiber optic cable is connected to the X16/LD connector in theprotection relay and in Ethernet FX connector in the pilot wire modem.

Setting or configuration is not needed with either of the pilot wire modem variants orwith the protection relay. Pilot wire link lengths up to 8 km with 0.8 mm2 twisted paircables can be applied. Even higher distances can be achieved with good qualitytwisted pair cables in the pilot wire link. The achieved link length also depends on thenoise levels in the installations.

The pilot wire modem has QoS LEDs in the front panel for easy diagnostics of the pilotwire link quality. The diagnostics feature does not depend on the payload over thepilot wire link and can be used for checking the quality of the intended pilot wire linkeven without installing the protection relays. In addition, a diagnostic kit is availableas an ordering option for more advanced diagnostic and logging of diagnostic

1MRS756498 N Section 5Protection relay's physical connections

RED615 181Application Manual

Page 188: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

parameters of the pilot wire link. The kit consists of a CD-ROM with the RPW600Diagnostic Tool software with a built-in help, required drivers and a special serialdiagnostic cable to be connected to the console port of the modem.

RED615

MM or SM fiber optic

RED615

Fibre optic link

RED615

SM fibre optic

Galvanic pilot wire twisted-pair

RPW600Mpilot wire modem master

RED615

≥ 3 m

SM fibre optic

≥ 3 m

Galvanic pilot wire link

RPW600Fpilot wire modem

follower

GUID-D4D15565-FD47-425D-8ABE-EA1A3C455673 V1 EN

Figure 252: Protection communication options

See RPW600 user guide for more information.

Section 5 1MRS756498 NProtection relay's physical connections

182 RED615Application Manual

Page 189: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Section 6 Glossary

100BASE-FX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernetstandard for local area networks (LANs) that uses fiberoptic cabling

100BASE-TX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernetstandard for local area networks (LANs) that usestwisted-pair cabling category 5 or higher with RJ-45connectors

615 series Series of numerical protection and control relays forprotection and supervision applications of utilitysubstations, and industrial switchgear and equipment

AI Analog inputASCII American Standard Code for Information InterchangeBI Binary inputBIO Binary input and outputBO Binary outputCB Circuit breakerCT Current transformerDAN Doubly attached nodeDC 1. Direct current

2. Disconnector3. Double command

DNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed byWestronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownershipof the protocol and assumes responsibility for itsevolution.

DPC Double-point controlEMC Electromagnetic compatibilityEthernet A standard for connecting a family of frame-based

computer networking technologies into a LANFIFO First in, first outFTP File transfer protocolFTPS FTP SecureGOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation EventGPS Global Positioning System

1MRS756498 N Section 6Glossary

RED615 183Application Manual

Page 190: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

HMI Human-machine interfaceHSR High-availability seamless redundancyHTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol SecureI/O Input/outputIEC International Electrotechnical CommissionIEC 60870-5-103 1. Communication standard for protective equipment

2. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-pointcommunication

IEC 61850 International standard for substation communicationand modeling

IEC 61850-8-1 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850standard series

IEC 61850-9-2 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850standard series

IEC 61850-9-2 LE Lite Edition of IEC 61850-9-2 offering process businterface

IED Intelligent electronic deviceIEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices'

(IEDs') Cyber Security CapabilitiesIP address A set of four numbers between 0 and 255, separated by

periods. Each server connected to the Internet isassigned a unique IP address that specifies the locationfor the TCP/IP protocol.

IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code formatB

LAN Local area networkLC Connector type for glass fiber cable, IEC 61754-20LCD Liquid crystal displayLE Light EditionLED Light-emitting diodeLHMI Local human-machine interfaceMAC Media access controlMCB Miniature circuit breakerMMS 1. Manufacturing message specification

2. Metering management systemModbus A serial communication protocol developed by the

Modicon company in 1979. Originally used forcommunication in PLCs and RTU devices.

Section 6 1MRS756498 NGlossary

184 RED615Application Manual

Page 191: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

Modbus TCP/IP Modbus RTU protocol which uses TCP/IP and Ethernetto carry data between devices

NC Normally closedNO Normally openPCM600 Protection and Control IED ManagerPO Power outputPRP Parallel redundancy protocolPTP Precision Time ProtocolQoS Quality of serviceRIO600 Remote I/O unitRJ-45 Galvanic connector typeRS-232 Serial interface standardRS-485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocolRTD Resistance temperature detectorRTU Remote terminal unitSAN Single attached nodeSingle-line diagram Simplified notation for representing a three-phase

power system. Instead of representing each of threephases with a separate line or terminal, only oneconductor is represented.

SLD Single-line diagramSMV Sampled measured valuesSNTP Simple Network Time ProtocolSO Signal outputTCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet ProtocolTCS Trip-circuit supervisionVT Voltage transformerWAN Wide area networkWHMI Web human-machine interface

1MRS756498 N Section 6Glossary

RED615 185Application Manual

Page 192: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

186

Page 193: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

187

Page 194: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content
Page 195: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content
Page 196: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content

ABB Distribution SolutionsDistribution AutomationP.O. Box 699FI-65101 VAASA, FinlandPhone +358 10 22 11

ABB Distribution AutomationManeja WorksVadodara-390013, IndiaPhone +91 265 2604386Fax +91 265 2638922

www.abb.com/mediumvoltagewww.abb.com/relionwww.abb.com/substationautomation

© Copyright 2018 ABB. All rights reserved. 1MR

S75

6498

N